| Download: |  |
| Mirror Download [FCC.gov] | |
| Document ID | 1641691 |
| Application ID | qi12EVDdc0oREyp3SUDhfg== |
| Document Description | Users Manual 6 |
| Short Term Confidential | No |
| Permanent Confidential | No |
| Supercede | No |
| Document Type | User Manual |
| Display Format | Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf |
| Filesize | 188.87kB (2360879 bits) |
| Date Submitted | 2012-02-22 00:00:00 |
| Date Available | 2012-02-24 00:00:00 |
| Creation Date | 2011-12-15 14:07:12 |
| Producing Software | Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows) |
| Document Lastmod | 2011-12-15 14:07:12 |
| Document Title | Microsoft Word - 23-20-06.docx |
| Document Creator | PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2 |
| Document Author: | kketcham |
UL-801
Installation Manual
The information contained herein is subject to the Export Administration Regulation
(“EAR”), 15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
This publication is available at www.uasc.com.
© 2011 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
3260 East Universal Way
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
(520) 295-2300 • (800) 321-5253
23-20-06
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Record of Revisions
Rev No.
Issue Date
Insertion Date
Initials
UASC
Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of revision, insert and remove pages
according to the List of Effective Pages. Then enter on this page the revision number, issue date,
insertion date and your initials.
23-20-06 15 DecemberPage
2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Record of Temporary Changes
Change
No.
Page No.
Issue Date
Insertion Date &
Initials
Removal Date/Initials/Reason
Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, page number, issue date, insertion date and your
initials. Also, record the removal of each temporary change.
Page 1
15 December 2011
23-20-06
UL-801 Installation Manual
Record of Temporary Changes (Continued)
Change
No.
Page No.
Issue Date
Insertion Date &
Initials
Removal Date/Initials/Reason
Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, page number, issue date, insertion date and your
initials. Also, record the removal of each temporary change.
Page 2
15 December 2011
23-20-06
UL-801 Installation Manual
List of Effective Pages
Subject
Page
Date
Page
Date
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
FAA Approval
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
Equipment
Specifications
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
Installation and
Wiring
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
Subject
15 Dec 2011
Title Page
Record of Revisions
15 Dec 2011
Record of Temporary
Changes
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
List of Effective
Pages
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
Table of Contents
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
Introduction
15 Dec 2011
Description and
Operation
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
23-20-06 15 DecemberPage
2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Subject
System Data
Installation
Page
Date
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
Subject
Maintenance,
Checkout, and
Troubleshooting
Page
Date
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
23-20-06 15 DecemberPage
2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Subject
Page
Date
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
Appendix 1
A1-1
A1-2
A1-3
A1-4
A1-5
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
Appendix 2
A2-1
A2-2
A2-3
A2-4
A2-5
A2-6
A2-7
A2-8
A2-9
A2-10
A2-11
A2-12
A2-13
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
15 Dec 2011
Appendix 3
A3-1
15 Dec 2011
23-20-06 15 DecemberPage
2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Table of Contents
Record of Revisions ............................................................................................................. 1
Record of Temporary Revisions ........................................................................................... 1
List of Effective Pages .......................................................................................................... 1
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................. 1
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 1
1. Makeup and Use of This Manual ............................................................................... 1
A. Application ......................................................................................................... 1
B. Organization ...................................................................................................... 1
2. Abbreviations and Terminology ................................................................................. 1
3. Contact Information ................................................................................................... 1
Description and Operation .................................................................................................... 1
1. Description ................................................................................................................. 1
A. General ............................................................................................................... 2
B. Future Air Navigation System (FANS 1/A+) ........................................................ 3
C. Field-Loadable Software and Databases ........................................................... 4
D. Field-Loadable Software Interface ..................................................................... 5
E. UniLink Customer, ATC, and Geographic Databases........................................ 5
F. UASC FMS Interface ......................................................................................... 7
G. Configuration Module....................................................................................... 17
H. ARINC 429 Channels ...................................................................................... 17
I.
RS-232/422 Serial Ports .................................................................................. 18
J.
Discrete Inputs/Outputs ................................................................................... 19
K. Ethernet ........................................................................................................... 22
L. Transmission Media Management ................................................................... 22
M. VHF Management............................................................................................ 23
N. SatCom-based Airborne Telephony (TEL) ....................................................... 24
O. SatCom-based ARINC 741 (SAT) ................................................................... 26
P. ACARS Message Processing .......................................................................... 27
Q. Advisory Alerts, Device Status, and Error Messages....................................... 29
R. COCKPIT Voice Recorder (CVR) .................................................................... 29
S. Printers ............................................................................................................ 30
T. Transmission Media Interfaces – Configuration Option ................................... 31
U. Text Message Processing ............................................................................... 31
V. Media Advisory Reporting Option .................................................................... 31
W. Automatic Position Reporting Option ............................................................... 31
X. OOOI Reporting/History Option ....................................................................... 31
Y. Flight Leg Transition ........................................................................................ 32
Z. Meteorological Data Reproting Option ............................................................. 32
AA. ARINC 741 using Iridium or Inmarsat .............................................................. 32
2. Operation ................................................................................................................. 32
CONTENTS
Page 1
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
FAA Approval .................................................................................................................... 101
1. General................................................................................................................... 101
A. Applicable TSOs .............................................................................................. 101
B. TSO Deviations ................................................................................................ 101
C. Equipment Classes .......................................................................................... 102
D. Reference Documents ..................................................................................... 102
E. Other References ............................................................................................. 103
2. Software Criticality .................................................................................................. 105
3. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness ................................................................ 106
A. Airworthiness Limitations ................................................................................. 107
B. Compliance ...................................................................................................... 107
4. Environmental Qualification Forms ......................................................................... 108
5. Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement ........................................................... 112
Equipment Specifications .................................................................................................. 201
1. UniLink Equipment Specifications .......................................................................... 201
A. UniLink Part Number Matrix ............................................................................. 201
B. UniLink Installation Kit ...................................................................................... 202
C. Power Specifications ........................................................................................ 202
D. Equipment Weights .......................................................................................... 202
E. VHF Antenna Specifications ............................................................................ 202
F. Electronic Part Marking .................................................................................... 203
G. Equipment Drawings ........................................................................................ 204
H. Signal Specifications ........................................................................................ 207
I. HS-429-1 Bus – UniLink................................................................................... 211
J. Configurable LRUs ........................................................................................... 212
Installation and Wiring ....................................................................................................... 301
1. Installation Considerations for UniLink Mounting .................................................... 301
A. UniLink Mounting ............................................................................................. 301
2. Wiring Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 301
A. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C .................................................................... 302
B. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C+ .................................................................. 304
C. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1E .................................................................... 306
D. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Csp ................................................................ 308
E. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Esp................................................................. 310
F. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D .................................................................... 312
G. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D+ .................................................................. 314
H. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1F .................................................................... 316
I. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K .................................................................... 318
J. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K+ .................................................................. 320
K. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1L ..................................................................... 322
L. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Ew .................................................................. 323
M. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Espw .............................................................. 325
N. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Lw .................................................................. 327
O. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Fw .................................................................. 329
P. UL-801 FANS Discretes (WAAS FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later) ................ 331
Q. UL-801 to EFI-890R – High Resolution ............................................................ 332
CONTENTS
Page 2
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
R. UL-801 to MFD-640 – High Resolution (MFD SCN 1011.4.8 or later) ............. 333
S. UL-801 to Remote CDU (RCDU) - Low Resolution ......................................... 334
T. UL-801 to MFD-640 – Low Resolution (MFD SCN 1011.4.7 or earlier) ........... 335
U. UL-801 to CVR/CVFDR ................................................................................... 336
V. UL-801 to DTU-100 ......................................................................................... 337
W. UL-801 to SSDTU ........................................................................................... 337
X. UL-801 to Portable DTU-100 ........................................................................... 338
Y. UL-801 to Portable SSDTU ............................................................................. 338
Z. UL-801 to Airborne-based Telephony SatCom Systems ............................... 339
AA. UL-801 to ARINC740/744/744A Printer ......................................................... 341
BB. UL-801 to PC Printer ..................................................................................... 342
CC. UL-801 to Generic Parallel Printer ................................................................. 342
3. UL-801 Connector Pin Identification ...................................................................... 343
A. Top Plug .......................................................................................................... 343
B. Middle Plug ..................................................................................................... 345
C. Bottom Plug ..................................................................................................... 346
4. UL-801 Connectors ................................................................................................ 347
System Data Installation ................................................................................................... 401
1. International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Aircraft Type Designators ........... 401
2. Configuration Worksheets ..................................................................................... 405
A. Customer/Aircraft Information.......................................................................... 406
B. System Configuration Menu (Sys Config 1/4) ................................................. 406
C. SYS CONFIG 2/4 ............................................................................................ 424
D. SYS CONFIG 3/4 ............................................................................................ 426
3. Configuration Procedures ...................................................................................... 428
A. Starting the FMS ............................................................................................. 428
B. FANS Block Data Transmission ...................................................................... 431
C. Storing UniLink Options ................................................................................... 432
D. Configuration Edit Mode .................................................................................. 433
E. Aircraft Configuration....................................................................................... 435
F. Clearances ...................................................................................................... 436
G. Alerts ............................................................................................................... 437
H. System Configuration 3/4 ................................................................................ 438
I. I/O Configuration ............................................................................................. 439
J. VHF Configuration ........................................................................................... 446
K. Satellite (SAT) Configuration ........................................................................... 447
L. Priority Configuration ....................................................................................... 448
M. Telephony (TEL) Configuration ....................................................................... 449
N. Position Report Configuration.......................................................................... 450
O. Configuration Review ...................................................................................... 451
Maintenance, Checkout, and Troubleshooting ................................................................. 501
1. UniLink Ground Checkout Procedures .................................................................. 501
A. Post Installation Test ....................................................................................... 501
B. Return to Service............................................................................................. 501
C. UniLink to FMS/MCDU Communications ........................................................ 501
D. Version Check ................................................................................................. 502
CONTENTS
Page 3
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Device Status ................................................................................................... 502
UniLink to Display Processor RS-422 Communications................................... 502
UL-801 VHF Communications ......................................................................... 503
OOOI Sensor Test ........................................................................................... 503
Printer Test ...................................................................................................... 504
Checking the UL-801 FANS ALERTS Output Discretes .................................. 504
Checking the UL-801 Self-Test (Optional) ....................................................... 504
Checking the UL-801 Weather Graphics using a SatCom-based
Telephony System ........................................................................................... 504
M. Checking the UL-801 ARINC 741 SatCom (SAT) ............................................ 505
2. Error Messages ...................................................................................................... 506
A. Pop-up Window Error Messages ..................................................................... 506
B. General Error Messages .................................................................................. 507
C. Configuration Error Messages ......................................................................... 512
D. Hidden Error/Status Messages ........................................................................ 519
Appendix 1 ...................................................................................................................... A1-1
1. Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Terms ................................................................... A1-1
Appendix 2 ...................................................................................................................... A2-1
1. UniLink Menus and Submenus – without FANS ................................................... A2-1
A. UniLink Menu 1/2 ........................................................................................... A2-1
B. UniLink Menu 2/2 ........................................................................................... A2-3
C. Maintenance Menu ........................................................................................ A2-4
D. Configuration Menu ........................................................................................ A2-5
2. UniLink Menus and Submenus – with FANS ........................................................ A2-6
A. UniLink Menu 1/2 ........................................................................................... A2-6
B. Maintenance Menu ...................................................................................... A2-10
C. Ops Menu .................................................................................................... A2-12
Appendix 3 ...................................................................................................................... A3-1
1. Datalink Service Providers ................................................................................... A3-1
CONTENTS
Page 4
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Introduction
1.
Makeup and Use of This Manual
A.
Application
This manual provides installation information pertaining to the UL-801.
B.
Organization
This manual provides information about:
• Description of the components of the UL-801
• Environmental qualification forms
• UniLink equipment specifications
• Installation and wiring requirements
• Worksheets and procedures for installing system data including configuring the UL-801
Configuration Module
2.
Abbreviations and Terminology
This manual contains no abbreviations or terms that have varying interpretations throughout
the industry. Refer to Appendix 1 for a list of acronyms, abbreviations, and terms that are
used throughout this manual.
The front panel of the Control Display Unit/Multi-function Control Display Unit
(CDU/MCDU), part of the FMS, contains an array of push buttons or keys that are used by
the crew to operate the system. Instructions in this manual refer to specific keys by name. We
bracket the legend on the key in the text. Examples: [ENTER], [A]. Line Select Keys (LSK)
are referred to by numerical order (top to bottom) and side. Text appearing on the display
may be included. Example: RETURN [5R].
3.
Contact Information
Please submit comments, suggestions, errors or other concerns about this manual to our
Technical Publications Department at techpubs@uasc.com.
To order copies or request changes in address and distribution information, contact
info@uasc.com.
For technical questions, please contact customersupport@uasc.com
23-20-06
Page 1
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Description and Operation
1.
Description
The UL-801 Airborne Datalink provides an air-to-ground two-way digital datalink that meets
the need for specific air-to-ground communications. UniLink communicates with multiple
ground-based Datalink Service Providers (DSP) using a VHF radio and/or SatCom
telephony-based system. The UL-801 contains an internal VHF Data Radio (VDR).
NOTE: Both DSP and DLSP are used as acronyms for Datalink Service Providers.
The Datalink system consists minimally of an FMS, a CDU/MCDU, the UL-801, a
transmission medium, such as a VDR or SatCom, and a configuration module. The UL-801
supports connections with up to three FMSs and one remote CDU, and connections to a
VDR; and peripheral devices, such as UASC multifunction displays (MFDs) (including the
MFD-640 and Electronic Flight Instrument-890R (EFI-890R) displays) and a printer.
This Installation Manual applies to both FANS-enabled and non-FANS-enabled UniLink
systems unless otherwise noted.
UniLink capabilities include:
• Future Air Navigation System (FANS)
• Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications (CPDLC) messaging
• Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Contract (ADS-C)
• CVR/CVFDR Output for datalink recording
• OOOI (Out-Off-On-In) reporting
• Automatic position reporting
• Fight planning route uplinks
• Aircraft triggered events
• Clearances/Requests
− Pre-departure
− Oceanic
− Pushback
− Expected Taxi
• Textual and graphical color weather maps or depictions in both low and high resolution
formats
• Digital Automatic Terminal Information System (D-ATIS, which is sometimes referred
to as ATIS)
• Terminal Weather Information for Pilots (TWIP)
• Free Text messaging
• Special Status reports (for example, delays, ETA updates, and diversions).
23-20-06
Page 1
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
The communication links used to exchange data are Very High Frequency (VHF), including:
• The legacy Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting system (ACARS)
• Next-generation VHF digital link (VDL) Mode 2
• Satellite Communications (SatCom).
The UL-801 is designed to be interfaced with, and controlled through, a variety of Universal
Avionics Control Display Units (CDUs) or Multi-function Control Display Units (MCDUs)
that are integrated with a Universal Avionics Flight Management System (FMS). The
UL-801 can also be controlled via an MCDU with ARINC 702 FMS or 743/743A GNSS.
Uplink text messages are displayed on Universal’s CDU/MCDUs. Color graphical weather
maps may be displayed on Universal’s CDUs, MCDUs, Multi-Function Displays (MFD),
and Flat Panel Integrated Display (FPID), as well as UASC’s EFI-890Rs.
High resolution graphics ports support up to two high-resolution display devices, such as a
capable EFI-890R ND and/or an MFD-640.
UniLink is capable of simultaneously transmitting and or receiving messages on more than
one transmission link at a time (VHF and SatCom, which includes SAT and TEL). Messages
may be generated on the ground and sent to the aircraft (uplink message) or messages can be
generated from the aircraft and sent to the ground (downlink message). Downlink messages
are generated by the crew, internally by the UniLink, or any one of the peripheral units may
generate a message to be passed on to the UniLink for transmission. When UniLink receives
an uplink message, it determines if the message should be processed internally or be sent to a
peripheral device specified by a message sub-label. Messages can be predefined as ARINC
Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS) messages or UniLink
supported messages, such as specialized weather requests or graphical weather maps, or text
messages routed to a printer.
The communications link connects the UniLink-equipped aircraft directly to a DSP. This
provides a general purpose communications link between the aircraft and ground computers
utilizing such first party service providers such as ARINC, SITA, and/or AVICOM. It is the
user’s decision which DSP is selected. The decision may also be based on the second-party
DSP to which the user subscribes.
In order to aid in potential incident/accident investigations, UniLink supports the
transmission of datalink records to an ARINC Characteristic 757 Cockpit Voice Recorder
(CVR) and a Cockpit Voice Flight Data Recorder (CVFDR).
A.
General
The UL-801 provides two-way datalink for air-to-ground communications which allows
communication with a DSP for a variety of available services. In order for UniLink to be
utilized, a DSP subscription is required. Each DSP may not support all UniLink services.
Contact your DSP for a list of supported services. A list of available UniLink DSPs can be
found in Appendix 3.
UniLink communicates via one or more communication systems: VHF and/or Satellite
SatCom systems. It supports an RS-232 serial or ARINC 429 (740, 744/744A) cockpit
printer to print various uplink messages, such as a textual weather report. The UniLink also
connects to a DTU/SSDTU to allow future software and database updates.
Page 2
15 December 2011
23-20-06
UL-801 Installation Manual
SatCom weather graphic uplinks via circuit mode data and text weather uplinks via Short
Burst Data (SBD) or packet data mode may or may not be available, based on your selected
DSP and the SatCom equipment installed. In addition, some functions/features may only be
available through specific communications systems as described in the following table.
Supported Applications1
AOC Text, and
ACARS Air
Flight
ATC FANS Weather
Text, Weather, and Traffic Services
Information
1/A+
Graphics4
D-ATIS
excluding FANS Services (FIS)
VHF (VDL Mode 2 and POA)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
SatCom (UASC Aero-I)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
SatCom (UASC Aero-M)
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Iridium SatCom ARINC 741
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes4
No
Iridium SatCom RS-232
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Inmarsat SatCom ARINC 741
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes4
No
Inmarsat SatCom RS-232
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
1. Check with the DSP for applicable supported applications.
2. Communication Systems must meet DO-178B Level D to be used for FANS applications.
3. The following Flight Information Services are available thru the internal VHF radio or a capable and
approved Packet Mode Data or Short Burst Data SatCom system. Contact your DSP and SatCom
manufacturer for more information.
• Pre-departure clearance
• Oceanic clearance
• D-ATIS
• TWIP
• Pushback clearance
• Expected taxi clearance
4. Check with the Iridium or Inmarsat SatCom manufacturer for current FANS approvals.
5. Graphical weather information is available only when the UniLink is interfaced to a circuit mode data
SatCom system via the RS-232 connection and supported by the DSP. The older tip and ring circuit mode
data interface that was available on all previous UniLink models, UL-60X and UL-70X, has been removed.
Communication System2
B.
Future Air Navigation System (FANS 1/A+)
UniLink system functionality is greatly enhanced by a Future Air Navigation System
(FANS) 1/A+ implementation, which is intended to improve safety of flight, enhance
efficiency, and increase air traffic capacity by replacing voice transmissions between crews
and ATC with datalink messages during flight in oceanic and remote areas that have no or
limited radar coverage. Voice transmissions will continue to be used as a reversionary means
of communication. UniLink provides a FANS-1/A+ implementation as defined in
RTCA/DO-258A and A622. FANS-1/A+ features include AFN, ADS, and CPDLC text data
transmissions.
At least one UASC FMS must be installed and operating with SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later
for the UniLink FANS-1/A+ implementation. The FMS must be configured to enable FANS
data transmission and must be configured to transmit to UniLink over the UNS HS-429-1
bus.
23-20-06
Page 3
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
FANS-1 is the original version of FANS developed by Boeing and FANS-A is the
corresponding version developed by Airbus. Both of these versions are interoperable with
worldwide ATC facilities and use the Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting
System (ACARS) network. UniLink’s FANS-1/A+ implementation is designated as such
because it is functionally equivalent to, and combines many of the best features of both
Boeing’s FANS-1 and Airbus’ FANS-A implementations.
Future Air Navigation System (FANS) is principally comprised of three applications:
•
•
•
C.
Air Traffic Services ATS Facilities Notification (AFN)
AFN allows the aircraft and an ATS provider on the ground to exchange addresses, as
well as information about which FANS applications they support.
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C)
ADS-C allows multiple ATS providers to command position reports and other situational
data at regular intervals or in response to events specified by the ATS provider, such as a
change in altitude or lateral deviation. ADS-C requires no crew interaction.
Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications (CPDLC)
CPDLC provides capabilities to substitute for traditional voice communications for
routine communications between a pilot and an air traffic controller. CPDLC messages
can be used to request and grant clearances, to inform the ground of the aircraft’s position
and situation, and to provide instructions to the crew, such as “Climb To Reach FL390
By 2200” or “Proceed Direct To TUNTO”.
Field-Loadable Software and Databases
The UniLink application software, Customer, ATC, and Geographic databases are loadable
in the field or at an authorized Universal Avionics dealer. During the software loading
process, automatic and manual version number verification procedures are performed to
ensure the compatibility of the software and database. A separate manual, 23-20-08, provides
the Field Loading procedures.
Detection of Corrupted or Partially Loaded Software
All loadable software and databases contain a 32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC). The
data-loading software function calculates a CRC upon receipt of a file and compares it to the
CRC included with the loaded data file thus rejecting any files whose contents have changed
during the loading process.
Determination of the Effects of Loading the Inappropriate Software
The system has been designed to guard against inappropriate software or database loading
based on version numbering. Loadable application software only functions with versions of
the hardware and boot software that supports the version type of software loaded. If an
incompatibility is detected during power-up checks, the system is placed into a state in which
no normal functions can occur. Only appropriate loadable databases and applications will
function with compatible versions of the main application software.
23-20-06
Page 4
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Hardware/Software Compatibility
The hardware versions are made available to the application software and are verified for
compatibility during power-up checks and during application software loading.
Restricted Access to the Field-Loading Function
The field-loading function is only enabled when the aircraft is on the ground and after a
password has been entered successfully.
UniLink Databases
The UniLink databases, consist of multiple database components including the Aeronautical
Operational Control (AOC) and Air Traffic Control (ATC) databases (required for FANS
operations) components, contains the definitions of nearly all user-interface screens, nearly
all uplink and downlink messages, a flight database that defines how data is formatted and
stored, and event triggers used for responses to system events. Database integrity is verified
by means of a 32-bit CRC at loading and during UniLink initialization.
D.
Field-Loadable Software Interface
UniLink provides an interface to load the following databases and application software via
the UASC Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) or UASC Solid State Data Transfer Unit
(SSDTU). Access to the software and database loading functions are password protected and
the aircraft must be on the ground. The UASC DTU physical interface is 10BaseT Ethernet.
The UniLink hardware contains a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port.
• Datalink application software
• VDR application software
• Customer database, which includes the AOC database
• ATC database
• Geographic database
UniLink provides user-interface screens that allow the user to command and monitor the
loading progression.
E.
UniLink Customer, ATC, and Geographic Databases
The Field Loadable Software database system provides flexibility in response to the
changing communications, navigation, and surveillance/air traffic management environment
for current and future regulations. The Customer Database (CDB)-driven user interface and
message set can be customized by UASC to match airline or business operator’s
requirements. Each database is described below.
All UniLink systems include three databases: the Customer Database, the Air Traffic Control
(ATC) Database, and the Geographic Database, and contains the definitions of the following:
• User interface screens
• Line Select Key functions
• Message definitions for uplink and downlink messages
• A flight database, which defines how data is formatted and stored
• Event triggers used for OOOI event reporting and other responses to system events
23-20-06
Page 5
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
The Customer Database (CDB)-driven user interface and message set can be customized to
match airline or business operator’s operational requirements. Each database is described
below.
•
•
•
Customer Database
Contains screen and message definitions for Aeronautical Operational Communications
(AOC) and Air Traffic Services (ATS) applications. Contains user definitions for uplink
and downlink messaging, and a flight database that defines how data is formatted and
stored, and event triggers used for responses to system events.
A 32-bit CRC is employed to confirm database integrity at loading, initialization, and
during flight. The customer database also has a version number that is checked upon
loading for compatibility with the application software. If the customer database CRC
check fails, UniLink annunciates the error and provides a screen for reloading the
customer database.
NOTE: The loading of the customer database erases the ATC database from UniLink
memory. Following a load of the customer database, the ATC database must
be reloaded.
Air Traffic Control (ATC) Database
Contains screen and message definitions for ATC applications, including the Future Air
Navigation Systems (FANS).
The system provides flexibility in response to the changing communications, navigation,
and surveillance/air traffic management environment for current and future regulations.
This database is used to define the UniLink ATC screens and message sets and is very
similar in function and purpose as the customer database.
A 32-bit CRC is employed to confirm database integrity at loading, initialization, and
during flight. The ATC database also has a version number that is checked upon loading
for compatibility with the application software and the customer database. If the ATC
database CRC check fails, UniLink annunciates the error and allows the user to continue
to access the functions defined by the customer database.
NOTE: Loading the ATC database does not affect the currently loaded customer
database or Geographic database.
Geographic Database
Contains aircraft communications addressing and reporting system (ACARS) ground
station locations and corresponding ACARS VHF frequency information.
The geographic database has a 32-bit CRC that is verified upon database loading. It also
has a version number that determines its compatibility with the application software. If
the geographic database CRC check fails, UniLink annunciates the error and prevents the
user from operating UniLink with a corrupted database.
NOTE: The Customer, ATC, and Geographic databases can be installed by UASC
and can also be field-loaded using a UASC DTU-100 or SSDTU. It is
recommended that this connection be installed as updates to these databases
may be required from time to time.
23-20-06
Page 6
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
F.
UASC FMS Interface
The UniLink provides concurrent user interface access for up to three UASC Flight
Management Systems. The ARINC 429 interface uses the ARINC 739 protocol for display
control and ARINC 619 bit oriented file transfer protocol for file exchange between the
devices. Each UASC FMS provides a high-speed ARINC 429 channel as inputs to UniLink.
The specific channel will be specified by the configuration module, based on aircraft wiring.
Any of the general purpose ARINC 429 output buses can be configured as output bus to the
FMS. However, ARINC TX port #1 is hard set to low speed and is required by the number 1
FMS. UniLink provides an RS-422 proprietary graphics display bus interface between the
unit and each UASC CDU for low resolution graphics.
23-20-06
Page 7
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(1)
UniLink interface capabilities
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
VHF ANTENNA
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
IRIDIUM/INMARSAT SATCOM
RS-232
A741
10 DISCRETE
INPUT DEVICES
14 DISCRETE
OUTPUT DEVICES
A741
OPEN/
GROUND
OPEN/
GROUND
A739 MCDU A739 MCDU A739 MCDU
UNILINK
UL-801
ARINC
A429
A429
CONFIGURATION
MODULE
UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEMS
SUPPORTS
UP TO 3
UASC FMSs
OR
ARINC 702A
FMC
STANDARD
ETHERNET
SOLID STATE DATA
TRANSFER UNIT (SSDTU) *
RS-422
GRAPHIC SUPPORT FOR UP TO 4 DISPLAYS
A429
A740/744/744A
PRINTER
RS-422
GRAPHIC
SUPPORT
FOR TWO
DISPLAYS
SERIAL PRINTER
RS-232
EFI-890R
HI-RES
NAV
DISPLAY
I/Os
DISCRETE: 10 IN/14 OUT
A429:
16 IN/8 OUT
RS-422
RS-232/422: 6 IN/6 OUT
A604 CMC
A429
MFD-640
HI-RES
NAV
DISPLAY
ETHERNET: 3 10/100 BASE-T
A429
DATA INPUT
ONE A743 GPS RECEIVER
OR A743A GNSS SENSOR
A429
A429
D A TA
RECORDING
DIGITAL ADC
A757 CVFDR/CVR
* DTU-100 MAY ALSO BE USED
23-20-06
Page 8
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
UL-801 to UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ Block Diagram – non FANS-enabled
UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ #1
UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ #2
UNIVERSAL
UNIVERSAL
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
BA
MS
ON/
OFF
±
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
BA
MS
ON/
OFF
±
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
ENT
U V W X Y Z
ENT
ARINC 429 LS
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 HS
RS-422
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801
CONFIGURATION MODULE
RS-232
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
ARINC 741
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
SSDTU*
CVR/CVFDR
UNIVERSAL
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
23-20-06
Page 9
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(3)
UL-801 to UNS-1Esp/UNS-1Csp+ Block Diagram – non FANS-enabled
UNS-1Esp/
UNS-1Csp+ #1
UNS-1Esp/
UNS-1Csp+ #2
UNIVERSAL
UNIVERSAL
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
BA
MS
ON/
OFF
±
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
BA
MS
ON/
OFF
±
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
ENT
U V W X Y Z
ENT
ARINC 429 LS
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 HS
RS-422
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
CONFIGURATION MODULE
RS-232
ARINC 741
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
SSDTU*
CVR/CVFDR
UNIVERSAL
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
23-20-06
Page 10
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(4)
UL-801 to UNS-1F/UNS-1D+ Block Diagram – non FANS-enabled
4/5" FPCDU
UNIVERSAL
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
BA
MS
ON/
OFF
±
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z
4/5" FPCDU
UNIVERSAL
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
ENT
U V W X Y Z
MS
BA
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
NCU #2
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
NCU #1
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
UNI
UNI
ARINC 429 LS
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 HS
RS-422
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
CONFIGURATION MODULE
RS-232
ARINC 741
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
SSDTU*
CVR/CVFDR
UNIVERSAL
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
23-20-06
Page 11
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(5)
UL-801 to UNS-1L/UNS-1K+ Block Diagram – non FANS-enabled
UNIVERSAL
UNIVERSAL
MSG
NA
MSG
NA
DAT
DT
DAT
FUE
FP
FUE
FP
TUN
VNA
TUN
VNA
PRE
LI
PRE
MENU
NEX
PER
PWR
DIM
NEX
PWR
DIM
1 2 3
H I J K L M N 4 5 6
O P Q R S T U 7 8 9
ENTE
BACK 0
V W X Y Z
DT
LI
1 2 3
H I J K L M N 4 5 6
O P Q R S T U 7 8 9
ENTE
BACK 0
V W X Y Z
MENU
PER
4 FPCDU
4 FPCDU
NCU #2
UNS-1L/UNS-1K+
NCU #1
UNS-1L/UNS-1K+
UNI
UNI
ARINC 429 LS
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 HS
VHF ANTENNA
CONFIGURATION MODULE
UL-801
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
RS-232
ARINC 741
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
SYSTEM
SSDTU*
CVR/CVFDR
UNIVERSAL
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
23-20-06
Page 12
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(6)
UL-801 to UNS-1Ew Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and
later)
UNS-1Ew #1
UNS-1Ew #2
UNIVERSAL
UNIVERSAL
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
BA
MS
ON/
OFF
±
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
ENT
U V W X Y Z
MS
BA
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
ARINC 429 LS
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 HS
RS-422
FANS
UL-801
CONFIGURATION MODULE
VHF ANTENNA
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
RS-232
ARINC 741
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
SSDTU*
CVR/CVFDR
UNIVERSAL
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS.
23-20-06
Page 13
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(7)
UL-801 to UNS-1Espw Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5
and later)
UNS-1Espw #1
UNS-1Espw #2
UNIVERSAL
UNIVERSAL
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
BA
MS
ON/
OFF
±
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
ENT
U V W X Y Z
MS
BA
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
ARINC 429 LS
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 HS
RS-422
FANS
CONFIGURATION MODULE
UL-801
VHF ANTENNA
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
RS-232
ARINC 741
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
SSDTU*
CVR/CVFDR
UNIVERSAL
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS.
23-20-06
Page 14
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(8)
UL-801 to UNS-1Fw Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and
later)
4/5" FPCDU
UNIVERSAL
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z
MS
BA
ON/
OFF
±
4/5" FPCDU
UNIVERSAL
DA
NA
VN
DT
LI
PR
FU
PE
TU
MEN
NE
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T
ENT
U V W X Y Z
BA
MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
NCU #2
UNS-1Fw
NCU #1
UNS-1Fw
UNI
UNI
ARINC 429 LS
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 HS
RS-422
FANS
UL-801
CONFIGURATION MODULE
VHF ANTENNA
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
RS-232
ARINC 741
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
SSDTU*
CVR/CVFDR
UNIVERSAL
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS.
23-20-06
Page 15
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(9)
UL-801 to UNS-1Lw Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and
later)
UNIVERSAL
UNIVERSAL
MSG
NA
MSG
DAT
DT
DAT
FUE
FP
FUE
FP
TUN
VNA
TUN
VNA
PRE
LI
PRE
MENU
NEX
PER
PWR
DIM
NEX
PWR
DIM
1 2 3
H I J K L M N 4 5 6
O P Q R S T U 7 8 9
ENTE
BACK 0
V W X Y Z
NA
DT
LI
1 2 3
H I J K L M N 4 5 6
O P Q R S T U 7 8 9
ENTE
BACK 0
V W X Y Z
MENU
PER
4/5" FPCDU
4/5" FPCDU
NCU #2
UNS-1Lw
NCU #1
UNS-1Lw
UNI
UNI
ARINC 429 LS
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 HS
CONFIGURATION MODULE
FANS
UL-801
VHF ANTENNA
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
RS-232
ARINC 741
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
SYSTEM
SSDTU*
CVR/CVFDR
UNIVERSAL
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS.
23-20-06
Page 16
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
G.
Configuration Module
The configuration module, an electrically erasable, programmable read-only memory
(EEPROM) device, is mounted on the rear of the mounting tray and connected via a
dedicated interface to the UniLink. The configuration module stores information specific to
the installation.
The user can view and retrieve the aircraft configuration through specially designed pages
that can be accessed through the keypad on the CDU or MCDU. The UniLink retrieves the
configuration data during each power up cycle. Modifications to the configuration are
possible only on the ground and are restricted through software interlocks.
H.
ARINC 429 Channels
UniLink provides sixteen ARINC 429 receivers and eight ARINC 429 transmitters.
(1)
(2)
ARINC 429 Receivers
The sixteen ARINC 429 receivers can be independently configured for supported
ARINC devices. The receiver bus speed (high or low) is determined by the ARINC
device selected during configuration.
ARINC 429 Transmitters
ARINC 429 transmitter, Port #1, is set to low speed by default. The remaining seven
ARINC 429 transmitters can be independently configured for bus speed (high or
low). Multiple ARINC devices of the same bus speed can be connected in parallel by
each transmitter configuration selection. Do not exceed 15 receive devices on one
ARINC transmitter port.
Device
UniLink TX Speed (NOTE 1)
UniLink RX Speed
UASC FMS/CDU 1
LOW
HIGH
UASC FMS/CDU 2
LOW
HIGH
UASC FMS/CDU 3
LOW
HIGH
739 MCDU 1
LOW
LOW
739 MCDU 2
LOW
LOW
739 MCDU 3
LOW
LOW
702 FMS 1
LOW or HIGH
NOTE 2
702 FMS 2
LOW or HIGH
NOTE 2
702 FMS 3
LOW or HIGH
NOTE 2
740/744/744A Printer
LOW
LOW
741 SDU
LOW
LOW
LOW
Not Applicable
Vibro-Meter CMC
LOW
HIGH
604 CMC
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
DHC8 IOP 1
Not Applicable
LOW
DHC8 IOP 2
Not Applicable
LOW
Voice Tune Bus
750 VDR
NOTE 6
NOTE 6
23-20-06
Page 17
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Device
UniLink TX Speed (NOTE 1)
UniLink RX Speed
Test Device (NOTE 3)
LOW or HIGH
HIGH
ARINC 743A GNSS Receiver
Not Applicable
HIGH or LOW (NOTE 4)
DADC1
Not Applicable
HIGH or LOW (NOTE 5)
DADC2
Not Applicable
HIGH or LOW (NOTE 5)
Generic 429 Device (1 – 4)
LOW or HIGH
NOTE 2
757 CVR HIGH
HIGH
Not Applicable
Device TX speed supported by UniLink.
The customer database specifies the data speed of this configurable device.
The test device is not used in aircraft installations.
References to an ARINC 743A GNSS receiver also include ARINC 743 Global Positioning
System (GPS) receivers. UniLink automatically detects the transmission speed (high/low)
of the GNSS or GPS and configures the interface accordingly.
NOTE 5: UniLink automatically detects the transmission speed (high/low) of the Digital ADC and
configures the interface accordingly.
NOTE 6: Does not apply to UL-801.
NOTE 1:
NOTE 2:
NOTE 3:
NOTE 4:
I.
RS-232/422 Serial Ports
UniLink provides six general purpose RS-232/422 transmitters and six general purpose
RS-232/422 receivers. These ports are available to perform as six full duplex channels. The
ports are capable of operating up to a 19.2 kilobaud rate. The serial port type selection
(RS-232 or RS-422) is determined by the type of serial device selected during configuration.
UniLink RS-422 serial ports support the interface between the UniLink and various
combinations of CDU/MCDU display processors (DPs), flat-panel multifunction displays
(MFDs), and EFI-890R displays to accomplish display of uplinked graphic images.
UniLink can be connected to up to three CDUs and one remote CDU/MCDU via ARINC
739 protocol over an ARINC 429 physical layer providing UniLink with control of the
CDU/MCDU text display. The user selects graphics to acquire and display from text menus
rendered by UniLink on the CDU/MCDU via this interface.
EFI-890R and high-resolution MFD (SCN 1011.4.8) displays are connected to UniLink via
an RS-422. UniLink supports two high-resolution connections.
If the device assigned to a serial port is a low-resolution display, UniLink sets up that port as
an RS-422 port at a baud rate specified by configuration item CDU/MFD Baud Rate, options
9801 BPS or 19.2 KBS.
Other devices supported by UniLink RS-232/422 serial ports include a serial printer and
SatCom telephony functions
23-20-06
Page 18
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
J.
Discrete Inputs/Outputs
UniLink provides 10 general purpose discrete input connections and 14 general purpose
discrete output connections.
Discrete Inputs
5 VDC
3.3 VDC
DISCRETE
INPUT
NOTE:
THE TRANSITION VOLTAGE VALUE IS
3.8 VDC.
THE ABOVE CIRCUIT IS INTERNAL TO UNLINK.
Basic UniLink Discrete Input
Configurable Discrete Inputs
The discrete input signal types and active states (in other words, whether the signal state is
active when the input is open or connected to a ground) are configurable.
The following discrete input types are selectable from the UniLink Discrete Input
Configuration menu:
Park Brake Set
Park Brake Set Options
Active State
Active
Ground
Open
Park Brake Set
Park Brake Set
Inactive
Park Brake Released
Park Brake Released
Strut Comp
Strut Comp Options
Active State
Active
Inactive
Ground
Open
Strut Compressed
Strut Compressed
Strut Not Compressed
Strut Not Compressed
23-20-06
Page 19
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Door n Closed
Door n Closed Options
Active State
NOTE:
Active
Inactive
Ground
Door n is closed
Door n is open
Open
Door n is closed
Door n is open
If more than one door discrete input is wired and configured, the inputs are logically
AND’ed together by UniLink to determine approximately when "all doors are closed".
Discrete Outputs
UniLink provides 14 discrete outputs. Each discrete output is capable of current sinking up to
500mA, to drive relays, lights, and trigger a variety of aural warning generators.
12 VDC
CC
DISCRETE
OUTPUT
ENABLE
IN
THERMAL
LIMIT
<<1
NOTE:
THE ABOVE CIRCUIT IS INTERNAL TO UNLINK.
Basic UniLink Discrete Output
Configurable Discrete Outputs
The discrete output signal types and active states (in other words, whether the signal state is
active when the input is open or ground) are configurable.
FANS Visual (when FANS is enabled)
FANS Visual
Active State
Active
Inactive
Ground
FANS ATC annunciator on
FANS ATC annunciator off
(Recommended Configuration)
Open
FANS ATC annunciator off
FANS ATC annunciator on
NOTE:
1.
The ATC Annunciator power is connected to the aircraft 28 VDC.
2. This annunciator is used to alert the crew of an incoming FANS ATC message.
23-20-06
Page 20
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
FANS Aural (when FANS is enabled)
FANS Aural
Active State
Active
Ground
(Recommended Configuration)
Open
FANS alerter on
FANS ATC annunciator off
FANS alerter off
FANS ATC annunciator on
NOTE:
Inactive
The aural alerting devices must be connected to the aircraft 28 VDC power.
CPDLC Connect
CPDLC Connect
Active State
NOTE:
Active
Ground
CPDLC connection active
Open
No CPDLC connection
Use of this discrete is optional.
Inactive
No CPDLC connection
CPDLC connection active
New Message
New Message n
Active State
Active
Ground
New/unread message/graphic
received
No new/unread messages
Open
NOTE:
Inactive
No new/unread messages
New/unread message/graphic
received
This discrete is intended to drive a visual annunciator. Not associated with FANS
advisories.
Chime
Chime n
Active State
Active
Ground
New/unread message/graphic
received
No new/unread messages
Open
NOTE:
Inactive
No new/unread messages
New/unread message/graphic
received
This discrete is intended to drive an aural annunciator.
Media NOCOMM
VHF NOCOMM/SAT NOCOMM/TEL NOCOMM
Active State
NOTE:
Active
Inactive
Ground
Media link failed
Media link established/idle
Open
Media link established/idle
Media link failed
These discretes are intended to drive visual annunciators.
23-20-06
Page 21
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
K.
Ethernet
The UASC DTU-100/SSDTU physical interface is 10BaseT Ethernet. The UniLink hardware
contains a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. All UniLink interfaces to the UASC DTU-100 can be
directly applied to the UASC SSDTU without any modifications to the UniLink.
L.
Transmission Media Management
UniLink is capable of managing multiple links (VHF, TEL, and SAT) so that simultaneous
transmission and receipt of messages is possible on several different links. UniLink provides
individual management of the VDR radio and satellite communications equipment.
VHF Digital Link (VDL) Mode 2 Capability
The internal VDR is capable of supporting both the D8PSK modulation of the VDL Mode 2
channel and the current ACARS MSK modulation of the POA ACARS channel (which is
used when the aircraft is outside of the VDL Mode 2 coverage area) or directed by the DSP.
POA, in conjunction with VDL Mode 2, supports the Future Air Navigation System (FANS)
applications that include ATS Facilities Notification (AFN), Controller-Pilot Datalink
Communications (CPDLC), and Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C).
The aircraft’s 24-bit International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) address is required for
VDL Mode 2 communications. This address is obtained from the selected DSP and is entered
during the configuration process and is stored in the configuration module.
23-20-06
Page 22
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
M.
VHF Management
The UniLink contains an internal VHF radio for its data communication. UniLink will only
attempt to transmit if the radio has successfully tuned to the selected frequency. VHF
Management requires that UniLink perform the following tasks in order to manage the VHF
air-ground link:
•
•
•
Acquire a frequency - UniLink acquires a frequency by the Automatic selection method
or a frequency is provided by Autotune or manual crew selection/entry or recall from
previously established frequency from Non Volatile Memory at power up.
Establish a frequency - UniLink establishes the acquired frequency by transmitting a
downlink block and receiving a necessary Positive Acknowledgment response.
Maintain the frequency - UniLink maintains the established frequency until signal loss on
the frequency or until subsequent new frequency selection or entry.
The UniLink VHF Communication Status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page and is
explained by the table below.
VHF Media Status
Reason
COMM/IDLE
Communications have been established with the ground and datalink
messages can be transmitted over VHF. No data is currently being
transmitted.
COMM/SENDING
A message is currently in the process of being transmitted over VHF and
UniLink is waiting for acknowledgement from the ground.
NOCOMM/NO FREQ
UniLink has not selected a frequency for tuning due to invalid FMS lat/long
or no radio type
NOCOMM/SCANNING
UniLink is automatically selecting a frequency for tuning in current region
with enabled DSP.
NOCOMM/CONNECTING
UniLink has sent communication to the ground and is awaiting a reply.
NOCOMM/NO DSP
All DSPs have been manually selected OFF.
NOCOMM/VOICE
The VDR is in VOICE mode.
NOTE: Does not apply to UL-801 with internal VDR.
NOCOMM/VDR INOP
VDR inoperative.
NOCOMM/VDR FAULT
VDR is reporting a fault.
NOCOMM/VDR UNAVAIL
UniLink has not set the VDR’s protocol state.
NOCOMM/MONITORING
UniLink has not detected a viable VDL Mode 2 ground station.
NOCOMM/SUSPEND
VHF communications have been suspended by the crew.
23-20-06
Page 23
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
N.
SatCom-based Airborne Telephony (TEL)
A dedicated standard telephone modem is designed into UniLink. This modem is used to
transfer data between a supported ground station and the aircraft subsystems. For example,
the airborne telephone modem is initially used for uploading messages, text weather, and
graphical weather data from a DSP via a dial-up connection. UniLink manages only one
RS-232 port for this use.
SatCom-based Airborne Telephony is supported by Iridium and Inmarsat systems that
include an integral air phone modem which UniLink accesses via an RS-232 interface. The
airborne telephony modem uploads messages, text weather, and graphical weather from a
DSP.
It is important to note that the UniLink does not support the MagnaStar Digital Airborne
Telephone System and the UASC Aero-I. There is no UniLink tip and ring interface as was
the case with previous UL-60X/70X products. However, the legacy use of the word TEL,
which is used to abbreviate telephony, remains unchanged and continues to indicate the use
of a configured RS-232 UniLink port in support of such systems.
If TEL is configured to be used in the priority rotation, the request is then routed to an
available SatCom system via a configured RS-232 port.
The available options for RS-232-capable air phone configurations are UASC T-T Aero-M
or Iridium. The Iridium selection supports a variety of RS-232 available Iridium SatCom
products.
The UniLink Telephony Communications Status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page
and is explained in the following table.
23-20-06
Page 24
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Up to four low-resolution display devices can be connected to a single low-resolution bus
and one high-resolution device each can be connected to two high-resolution graphic ports.
TEL Media Status
Reason
COMM/MDM TIMEOUT
UniLink has dialed the phone but a timeout occurred prior to a connection
being established.
NOTE: Sequential, excessive timeouts will result in the NOCOMM/AUTO
DELAY message displaying.
COMM/DIALING
UniLink has provided the phone with the dial string command and is waiting
for the phone to answer.
COMM/CONNECTING
The ground has answered the phone and UniLink is communicating with the
DSP.
COMM/IDLE
The phone is hung up and no attempt is currently being made to use it and
SatCom (TEL) is not suspended or waiting to retry.
COMM/CONNECTED
The phone line is connected and messages can or are currently being
transferred.
COMM/PLEASE WAIT
TEL SUSPEND has been manually activated. UniLink is in the process of
shutting down the connection.
NOCOMM/SUSPENDED
SatCom (TEL) has been suspended, either by the crew or automatically due
to excessive failed attempts.
NOCOMM/AUTO DELAY
UniLink is waiting for the configurable AUTO-DELAY timer to expire before
trying again
NOCOMM/CONFIG FAIL
While CONNECTING with the ground server, a message is received saying
the configuration sent by UniLink is invalid. The SatCom (TEL) system is
permanently shut down. Cycling UniLink power is required to exit this state.
NOCOMM/INIT FAIL
The SatCom (TEL) system is not available for operation. One or both of the
following configuration items are invalid: Aircraft Registration Number, or
Phone Access Number.
NOCOMM/DIALING
UniLink exited out of the 5-minute delay and is in the process of making
another connection attempt.
NOCOMM/PLEASE WAIT
TEL SUSPEND has been manually activated while a connection is in
progress. UniLink is in the process of shutting down the connection.
NOCOMM/MDM TIMEOUT UniLink exited out of the 5-minute delay and while in the process of making
another connection attempt the UniLink modem has timed out.
23-20-06
Page 25
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
O.
SatCom-based ARINC 741 (SAT)
UniLink interfaces with an ARINC 741-capable SatCom system, such as the
Universal/Thrane & Thrane Aero-I SDU and others, via a low speed ARINC 429 interface.
Packet Mode ACARS data (Data 2) is sent to the SDU for forwarding to the ACARS
gateway on the ground through the Ground Earth Station (GES) and vice versa.
NOTE:
The UASC Aero-I SatCom system is not approved for FANS messaging.
The UniLink SAT Communication Status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page and is
explained in the following table.
SatCom Media Status
Reason
COMM/IDLE
SatCom (SAT) communication has been established and datalink messages
can be transmitted over SatCom. No data is currently being transmitted.
COMM/SENDING
A message is currently in the process of being transmitted. UniLink is
waiting for acknowledgement from the ground.
NOCOMM/SDU UNAVAIL
NOTE: SDU is the Satellite
Data Unit.
The SatCom’s system SDU is reporting that it is unavailable.
NOCOMM/SDU INOP
UniLink does not detect the SDU.
NOCOMM/AUTO DELAY
UniLink is waiting before trying to establish a SatCom (SAT) link again.
NOCOMM/TIMEOUT
Retries have been exhausted, and Auto Return to Comm configuration
setting is disabled. A manual Link Test must be performed, or an uplink
received for the medium to return to COMM.
NOCOMM/CONNECTING
A SatCom (SAT) link is in the process of being established.
NOCOMM/SUSPENDED
SatCom (SAT) link has been suspended by the crew.
COMM/IDLE
SatCom (SAT) communication has been established and datalink messages
can be transmitted over SatCom. No data is currently being transmitted.
COMM/SENDING
A message is currently in the process of being transmitted. UniLink is
waiting for acknowledgement from the ground.
NOCOMM/SDU UNAVAIL The SatCom’s system SDU is reporting that it is unavailable.
NOTE: SDU is the Satellite
Data Unit.
NOCOMM/SDU INOP
UniLink does not detect the SDU.
NOCOMM/AUTO DELAY
UniLink is waiting before trying to establish a SatCom (SAT) link again.
NOCOMM/TIMEOUT
Retries have been exhausted, and Auto Return to Comm configuration
setting is disabled. A manual Link Test must be performed, or an uplink
received for the medium to return to COMM.
NOCOMM/CONNECTING
A SatCom (SAT) link is in the process of being established.
NOCOMM/SUSPENDED
SatCom (SAT) link has been suspended by the crew.
23-20-06
Page 26
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Graphical Weather Depiction
UniLink provides configurable graphic ports which can be configured to interface with a
total of six graphics buses.
Graphical weather information is available only when the UniLink is interfaced to a SatCom
system via the RS-232 connection and supported by the DSP. The tip and ring data interface,
available on previous UniLink models, is no longer required and therefore has been removed.
The graphics capability has been improved by the addition of two high resolution output
ports. Graphics may be displayed in high resolution (Hi-Res) for units that are capable of
displaying high resolution graphics, such as the EFI-890R in the Navigation Display (ND)
position or an MFD-640 with SCN 1011.4.8 or later installed.
Example Graphic
These two high resolution RS-422 ports may be configured to support two dedicated
EFI-890R displays (all EFI-890Rs are capable of high resolution display while all
CDU/MCDUs display in low resolution). In the event that both a low resolution and a high
resolution graphic is requested, the UniLink automatically requests and uplinks two
formatted images reflecting the same data during the same call:
• One formatted to support the display of images on the low resolution output
• One formatted to support high resolution images that will result in a larger, higher quality
image
Graphics Display Configuration Options
The Graphics Display Configuration Options include low resolution graphics transmission to
CDUs, remote CDUs, MCDUs, MFDs; and high resolution graphics to high resolution
EFI-890R displays or an MFD-640 with SCN 1011.4.8 or later installed.
P.
ACARS Message Processing
UniLink provides services in the Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting
System (ACARS). There are two types of ACARS data communications, ground-to-air via
uplink messages and air-to-ground via downlink messages, both of which are supported by
SatCom or VHF. Messages sent from one aircraft to another can only be accomplished
through the use of user-defined messages via the ground network. Direct communication
from aircraft to aircraft is not available. Uplink messages are generated by Airline Ground
Host Centers or an equivalent service provider, ATC facilities or a Datalink Service Provider
(DSP) such as ARINC or SITA. Uplink messages not generated by a DSP are passed to a
23-20-06
Page 27
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
DSP which then sends the uplink messages to a designated UniLink system or aircraft. The
message is then processed by UniLink or, when the message is meant for a peripheral unit, is
passed on to the appropriate peripheral unit.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
ACARS Uplink Message Receiving
When UniLink receives an uplink message from the ground system, it performs a
Block Check Sequence (BCS) error check. If the BCS message is valid, UniLink
accepts the message and generates a positive acknowledgment for transmission to the
ground. If the uplink message contains an error, UniLink generates a negative
technical acknowledgment. Upon receipt of the negative technical acknowledgment,
the ground system should retransmit the uplink message.
ACARS Uplink Message Log
UniLink maintains an uplink message log capable of storing at least 40 AOC uplink
messages. UniLink stores only those uplink messages that are defined in the database
as requiring storage in the log. UniLink allows users to delete or print specific
messages from the message log. When the message log is full and a new message
requiring storage is received, UniLink will delete the oldest read message in the log.
When the log is full of messages that have not been read and a new message requiring
storage is received, UniLink will delete the oldest message.
ACARS Downlink Message Origination
There are several actions that can generate a downlink. The crew may do so via the
CDU/MCDU and route the message to the UniLink for transmission, or UniLink may
automatically generate a downlink as a response to an event having occurred, such as
weight off wheels or an automatic position report.
ACARS Downlink Message Queue
Once a downlink message is encoded, it is queued until the message can be
transmitted to the ground. UniLink is capable of maintaining at least 70 messages in
the transmission queue. UniLink allows users to delete or print specific messages
from the message log.
ACARS Downlink Message Transmission
When a valid communication link exists, UniLink transmits the message having the
highest priority. If more than one message shares the highest priority then UniLink
selects the oldest from that group of messages. Upon receipt of the downlinked
message, the DSP performs a BCS error check and, if the BCS is valid, it routes it to
the proper destination. The ground system also generates a positive technical
acknowledgment for the message and transmits it to the aircraft. Upon receipt of a
positive technical acknowledgment, UniLink considers the message successfully
transmitted.
23-20-06
Page 28
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Q.
Advisory Alerts, Device Status, and Error Messages
UniLink generates advisory alerts annunciating normal and non-normal conditions that
require crew action. Selecting the advisory alert displays the UniLink page on which the
corresponding information is displayed or from which a required action may be performed.
Examples of advisories are: NEW MSG, VHF VOICE, NOCOMM, and NEW WX MAP.
UniLink provides real-time status information for other LRUs UniLink interfaces with via
the DEVICE STATUS page. When configured, devices such as FMSs, internal VHF radio,
741 SatCom-based system, printer, etc. show as OK or INOP. INOP is displayed when
communication between both devices has failed. If a particular device is not configured,
UniLink displays NO CONFIG as the device status.
Additionally, the state of various input sensors including all analog discretes is displayed via
the SENSOR STATUS page. These displays are useful for initial system installation and
trouble-shooting in the field
UniLink generates error messages to alert the crew of non-normal conditions. Generally, a
NEW ERROR MSG advisory appears, which when selected will display the error message
title and additional details if applicable. A log of error messages appears on the ERROR
LOG page.
Examples of error messages are:
•
•
•
CONFIGURATION WARNING
POWER –ON BIT FAILURE
VHF CHANNEL CONGESTION
Additionally, UniLink generates pop-up windows for normal and non-normal alert
information that may require more timely crew awareness. Examples of pop-up window
messages are:
•
•
R.
QUEUE FULL
PRINT JOB COMPLETE
Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR)
Replacing voice communications between crews and air traffic control (ATC) with datalink
messages is intended to improve safety, enhance efficiency, and increase air traffic capacity.
This is one of the main features in the UniLink.
The UL-801 provides a configurable ARINC transmit port to support the recording of
datalink messages on a compatible ARINC 757Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR/CVFDR).
The CVR/CVFDR records all messages that are sent to it by the UniLink. Messages are
provided to the CVR/CVFDR on an ARINC 429 data bus. This port may be configured for
high or low speed based on the recorder’s speed requirement.
When an ARINC transmit port is connected to a UASC CVR/CVFDR, the ARINC transmit
port must be configured as follows:
• PORT SPEED:
HIGH
• PORT DEVICES: CVR
Page 29
15 December 2011
23-20-06
UL-801 Installation Manual
UniLink supports transmission of datalink message recordings to any ARINC Characteristic
757 CVR/CVFDR.
The following information is sent to the CVR/CVFDR as part of the recording process:
• Uplinks to the aircraft
• Downlinks from the aircraft
• The time the message is displayed to the crew
• The crew's response to the message
• UniLink status data
• Any peripheral data that is addressed to the CVR
Records sent to the CVR may contain the following information:
• The message priority (if any)
• The display status of the message
• Time stamps of the message
• Other information required to identify the message.
The following examples describe ways that UniLink processes such data.
Example 1: Uplink to the Crew (Weather Graphic Received)
In the event that an uplink intended for display to the crew is received (Weather Graphic),
UniLink transmits a record to the CVR/CVFDR. When UniLink receives the graphic uplink,
UniLink displays the graphic.
Example 2: Downlink from the Crew (Crew-Commanded Downlink)
In the event that the crew generates or commands a downlink (a command to send a
downlink is initiated by the crew from CDU/MCDU), UniLink transmits a record to the
CVR/CVFD or UniLink queues a downlink. UniLink transmits another record once the
message successfully sends or if a message fails to send.
S.
Printers
UniLink supports an interface to an ARINC 740/744/744A or a RS-232 serial printer.
UniLink only supports one printer in a configuration. If both ARINC and RS-232 serial
printers are configured, UniLink only uses the ARINC 740/744/744A printer.
UniLink supports printing of text data only. The maximum file size supported by UniLink is
16 KB, including any header and footer. If a print file is larger than 16 KB, UniLink discards
the print file and sends a message to the Status log.
NOTE:
The file size limit was derived to provide a design guideline for reserving
memory for print jobs. The maximum file size from an ACARS uplink is about 3
KB and the maximum Williamsburg file size supported by UniLink is 6,320
bytes.
23-20-06
Page 30
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
T.
Transmission Media Interfaces - Configuration Option
SatCom is supported with a configurable interface to an A741 SDU for text-based messages.
Telephony is supported with a configurable RS-232 interface to a UASC T-T Aero-M or
Iridium systems for both text-based messages and graphical weather maps. MagnaStar and
UASC Aero-I tip/ring telephony interfaces are not supported.
VHF communications are supported with a configurable ARINC interface to an external
A750 VDR for text-based messages.
U.
Text Message Processing
UniLink supports Aeronautical Operational Communications (AOC) flexible messaging and
FANS message handling. UniLink also supports both uplink and downlink messages from
peripheral systems.
UniLink supports Air Traffic Services ATS and AOC text messages, downlink graphical
weather requests, and uplink graphical weather images stored and displayed in one or more
message logs. Uplink and downlink message integrity checks are performed by means of a
32-bit CRC calculation.
Message alerting functions include configurable output discretes for visual and aural alerting
and digital outputs to various LRUs. Message alert inhibiting is configurable and is provided
during critical flight phases (takeoff and landing) and is based on flight parameters including
ground speed, altitude, and FMS approach mode.
V.
Media Advisory Reporting Option
If enabled, UniLink sends the Media Advisory message to update the DSP regarding the
status and availability of datalink media, such as VHF, TEL, or SAT. It is useful for the DSP
to know the available datalink media when preparing a message for transmission to UniLink.
Upon request by the host processor, the DSP may forward this information to other DSPs.
Crew interaction is not required.
W.
Automatic Position Reporting Option
The Automatic Position Reporting Option includes configurable on-ground and in-air
automatic position reporting selections. UniLink provides the ability to temporarily
disable/enable the automatic position reporting function and modify the reporting interval via
the UniLink POS REPORT page.
The Automatic Position Reporting messages may be customized by the user and may
conform to the format in ARINC Characteristic 702A. The user will be able to delay
transmission of Automatic Position Report messages for a configured amount of time after
the OFF event to reduce missed transmissions due to signal blockage during take off.
X.
OOOI Reporting/History Option
The OOOI Reporting/History Option includes Out, Off, On, In (OOOI) downlink messaging
and history maintenance stored in UniLink’s non-volatile memory. Configurable input
parameters (door, brake, strut, ground speed) can be received from multiple sources based on
the specific installation. It’s recommended that OOOI be enabled if ARINC is selected as a
DSP.
Page 31
15 December 2011
23-20-06
UL-801 Installation Manual
Y.
Flight Leg Transition
The Flight Leg Transition feature is provided to reduce the crew workload (such as
initializing the Origin of the next flight leg to the Destination of the flight leg that was just
completed). It is also used as a means of automatically logging data from a flight leg that was
just completed if that data may be needed for future reference, such as OOOI times and fuel.
Z.
Meteorological Data Reporting Option
The Meteorological Data Reporting Option includes processing of uplink configuration
settings and automatic downlink messaging. Meteorological data items include atmospheric
temperature, pressure, and wind speeds collected at various durations throughout the flight.
Crew interaction is not needed.
AA. ARINC 741 using Iridium or Inmarsat
UniLink provides a standard interface to ARINC 741-capable SatCom-based airborne
telephony systems. The UniLink meets DO-178B level C software requirements necessary
for all FANS messaging. The bearer systems such as Inmarsat and Iridium SatCom Systems
must meet DO-178B level D requirements. Check with the selected SatCom manufacturer
for further details regarding this important issue.
2.
Operation
The UniLink is operated by controls provided by the FMS CDU/MCDU. Refer to the
UniLink Operator’s Manual, 23-20-06.01, for UniLink Operating Procedures.
If FANS is enabled, the report number for the UniLink FANS Operations Manual is 23-2006.02. This manual must be obtained separately.
The Operator’s Manual introduces the CDU/MCDU, explains the CDU/MCDU operating
philosophy, and provides a detailed explanation of the keyboard keys, Line Select Keys
(LSK), and their associated functions.
23-20-06
Page 32
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
FAA Approval
1.
General
Installation approval of the UniLink system is being accomplished under a variety of STCs
and Forms 337. For a new installation to be eligible for approval, it will be necessary to
apply to the FAA for an STC or to utilize an existing STC or Form 337.
This manual contains information directing the follow-on TC or STC applicant to include
specific maintenance instructions in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual or ICA when the Field
Loadable Software process is expected to be used as called out in FAA Order 8110.49
Section 5-4.
ACARS/graphics datalink functionality is NOT approved under TSO-C160.
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation received U.S. Federal Communication Commission
“Grant of Equipment Authorization” on TBD, in accordance with FCC Rule Part 87, with the
following transmitter specifications:
A.
Mode
Output Power
(Minimum)
Frequency
Tolerance
Channel
Spacing
Frequency
Range
Emission
Designator
16 Watts
±30 PPM
25 kHZ
13K0A2D
15 Watts
±5 PPM
25 kHZ
118.000 to
136.975 MHz
118.000 to
136.975 MHz
14K0G1D
Applicable TSOs
•
TSO-C160
Refer to the TSO Deviations section.
B.
TSO Deviations
•
TSO-C160 Section 3.f Environmental Qualification
The FAA granted a deviation to use the environmental conditions specified in
RTCA/DO-160F in lieu of DO-160E.
•
TSO-C160 Section 4.a.(1) and 4.a.(2) Marking
The FAA granted deviations to allow the parts to marked using the model designation
system as referenced in 14 CFR § 21.619(b) Amdt. 21-92 in accordance with 14 CFR §
21.616(d) Amdt.21-92 and § 45.15b, Amdt. 45-26.
−
Section 4.a.(1) Marking: Authorization to mark the LRUs with the Model Designation
in order to capture both the hardware part number and software control number
(SCN).
− Section 4.a.(2) Marking: Authorization to not mark the LRUs with the date of
manufacture. Each part will be marked with a unique serial number.
23-20-06
Page 101
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
C.
Equipment Classes
Equipment Classes
•
UL-801, SCN 30:
− F
VDL Mode 2 receiver used in a 25-kHz channel separation environment
− 7
VDL Mode 2 transmitter used in a 25-kHz channel separation environment, intended
to operate with a range of 200 nautical miles
Equipment Architecture Classes
•
D.
UL-801, SCN 30:
− W (CMU)
− Y (VDR)
Reference Documents
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
TSO-C160 (11-Jan-2008): VDL Mode 2 Communications Equipment
DO-281A (08-Nov-2005): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for Aircraft
VDL Mode 2 Physical, Link, and Network Layer (MPS for TSO-C160)
AC 20-140A (07-Apr-2010): Guidelines for Design Approval of Aircraft Data
Communications Systems
AC 20-160 (21-Feb-2008): Onboard Recording of Controller Pilot Data Link
Communication in Crash Survivable Memory
DO-186B (08-Nov-2005): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for
Airborne Radio Communications Equipment Operating Within the Radio Frequency
Range 117.975 – 137.000 MHz
DO-258A (07-Apr-2005): Interoperability Requirements for ATS Applications Using
ARINC 622 Data Communications (FANS 1/A Interoperability Standard)
RTCA/DO-160F (06-Dec-2007): Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for
Airborne Equipment
RTCA/DO-178B (01-Dec-1992): Software Considerations in Airborne Systems and
Equipment Certification
RTCA/DO-254 (19-Apr-2000): Design Assurance Guidance for Airborne Electronic
Hardware
RTCA/DO-306/ED-122 (11-Oct-2007): Safety and Performance Standards for Air
Traffic Data Link Services in Oceanic and Remote Airspace (Oceanic SPR Standard)
ARINC 618-6 (Jun-2006): Air/Ground Character-Oriented Protocol Specification
ARINC 623-3 (Apr-2005): Character-Oriented Air Traffic Service (ATS)
Applications
ARINC 631-5 (Dec-2008): VHF Digital Link (VDL) Mode 2 Implementation
Provisions
ARINC 741P2-10 (09-Feb-2009): Aviation Satellite Communication System Part 2
System Design and Equipment Functional Description (Section 4.7 ACARS MU/CMU
- SATCOM Interface)
Page 102
15 December 2011
23-20-06
UL-801 Installation Manual
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
E.
ED-85A (Dec-2003): Data Link Application System Document (DLASD) for the
"Departure Clearance" Data-Link Service
ED-89A (Dec-2003): Data-Link Application System Document (DLASD) for the
"ATIS" Data-Link Service
ED-106A (Mar-2005): Data-Link Application System Document (DLASD) for the
“Oceanic Clearance” Data-Link Service
GOLD (14-Jun-2010): Global Operational Data Link Document (GOLD)
AC 120-70A (29-Dec-2005): Operational Authorization Process for use of Data Link
Communication System
ICAO Doc 9613 (01-Jan-2008): Performance-based Navigation (PBN) Manual
RTCA/DO-290/ED-120; Change 1 and Change 2 (29-Apr-2004): Safety and
Performance Requirements Standard for Air Traffic Data Link Services in
Continental Airspace (Continental SPR Standard)
ED-154 (Jul-2008): Future Air Navigation System 1/A - Aeronautical
Telecommunication Network Interoperability Standard
Other References
TSO Functions
(1)
VDL Mode 2 - Ref: TSO-C160, DO-281A, ARINC 631
Supports the requirements contained in TSO-C160 and MPS DO-281A. The UL-801
is equipment class F (VDL Mode 2 receiver used in a 25-kHz channel separation
environment) and 7 (VDL Mode 2 transmitter used in a 25-kHz channel separation
environment, intended to operate with a range of 200 nautical miles) and architecture
class W (CMU) and Y (VDR). The UL-800 is architecture class W (VDR).
TSO Supporting Functions
(1)
(2)
(3)
Data Loading of Software and Databases - Ref: ARINC 758, SRD
Application-level functionality may be field-modified by the transfer from portable
media (disk or flash memory) of the UniLink and VDR software programs as well as
databases that define the cockpit presentation, air/ground message types and formats,
as well as the geographic location of VHF ground stations.
Config Module Interface - Ref: ARINC 758, SRD
An aircraft "personality module" is integrated with the UniLink to hold configuration
data unique to the aircraft installation. This includes the physical connections as well
as customer-specific operational preferences.
BIT/Maintenance and Status Reporting - Ref: ARINC 758
Built-in-test and continuous health monitoring functions detect health of both internal
components (memory, I/O devices, S/W validity, etc.) as well as external systems.
Maintenance and Status reporting provides periodic output of the status of other
connected aircraft peripherals. Errors are presented to the cockpit and logged
internally for service and troubleshooting.
23-20-06
Page 103
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
VDL Mode A - Ref: ARINC 618, DO-186B
VDL Mode A refers to the analog communication protocols exercised by the VHF
data radio (VDR) and supported by the UniLink to exchange ACARS messages with
any appropriately equipped ground system. This mode is equivalent to the plain old
ACARS (POA) function of historical CMUs.
SatCom Communication Interface - Ref: ARINC 618, ARINC 619
Satellite-based communication is available to the UniLink through a digital interface
to an external satellite data unit (SDU). The SatCom interface provides an alternative
media to VHF for the transmission of ACARS messages supporting
FANS 1/A+, ACARS ATS, and AOC applications. Customer preferences usually
prioritize the use of SatCom communications lower than VHF communications
resulting in this function generally being used in Remote or Oceanic regions.
ACARS - Ref: ARINC 618
The Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS) is a data
link protocol and message structure which allows communication of characteroriented data between aircraft systems and ground communication service provider
systems.
AOA - ACARS over AVLC Ref: ARINC 618
The AOA function transports ACARS messages using ACARS routing over VDL
Mode 2 Aviation VHF Link Control (AVLC) - the data link layer. AOA provides a
more efficient, digital exchange of air/ground ACARS messages than VDL Mode A.
ACARS Air Traffic Services (for example, D-ATIS, PDC, OC) (TSO indirect) Ref: ARINC 622, ARINC 623
The ACARS ATS function is the exchange of text-based Air Traffic Services
information between the flight crew and ATS ground host processing systems. These
services include: Automatic Terminal Information Services (ATIS), Oceanic
Clearances (OC), Pre-Departure Clearances (PDC), Terminal Weather Information
for Pilots (TWIP), Pushback Clearances, and Expected Taxi Clearances.
Airline Operations Control (AOC – for example, text weather, weight, and balance) Ref: ARINC 620
The AOC function is the exchange of text-based information between the flight
crew/aircraft systems and the operator’s AOC processing systems (for example,
dispatch, maintenance, or meteorological services) throughout all phases of flight
(pre-flight, enroute, and post flight). Data included in the messages can be drawn
from other aircraft systems (such as I/O concentrator buses or FMS units) or can be
entered by the flight crew via a control and display unit.
Datalink Message Recording - Ref: ARINC 758, ARINC 619
Intending to improve safety, enhance efficiency, and increase air traffic capacity, the
trend of replacing voice communications between flight crews and air traffic control
(ATC) with datalink messages is becoming more prevalent. In order to aid in
potential incident/accident investigations, UniLink supports transmission of datalink
messaging records to an ARINC Characteristic 757 cockpit voice recorder (CVR).
Records presented to the CVR include messages exchanged between the UniLink and
23-20-06
Page 104
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
CSPs and between the UniLink and peripheral devices, datalink-based crew actions,
and other datalink events.
Non-TSO Functions
(1)
(2)
(3)
2.
Telephony Communication Interface - Ref: SRD
The telephony communication interface provides an alternate media for the limited
transfer of operator’s AOC messages and weather graphics between the aircraft and
the ground. The telephony interface uses industry standard protocols for access to an
airborne telephone modem that is part of an on-board satellite communication system.
Telephony messaging is supported through separate air-air/air-ground channels from
other SATCOM ACARS ATS and FANS 1/A+ message functions.
FANS 1/A+ Ops Credit for FANS - Ref: DO-258A, GOLD, ARINC 622
UniLink system functionality is greatly enhanced by offering a FANS-1/A +
implementation, which is intended to improve safety of flight, enhance efficiency,
and increase capacity by replacing routine voice transmissions between flight crews
and ATC with datalink messages during flight in oceanic and remote areas that have
no or limited radar coverage. FANS operational credit can be applied for following
UniLink installation airworthiness approval for aircraft that are properly equipped.
Weather Graphics - Ref: SRD
Graphical weather images can be requested by the crew and transferred by UniLink
from the ground via the Telephony Communication Interface and presented on
compatible display units (UASC only) in the cockpit. This facility is supported by
ground AOC facilities complying with UASC-proprietary protocols and message
formats. The images presented are intended for non-essential use.
Software Criticality
SCN 10.X Main UniLink Bootloader Software
Main UniLink Bootloader software version SCN 10.X is categorized as DO-178B Level D
(Minor). Level D software is defined by DO-178B as “software whose anomalous behavior,
as shown by the system safety assessment process, would cause or contribute to a failure of
system function resulting in a minor failure condition for the aircraft”.
VDR Bootloader SCN 10.X
The VDR boot software is partitioned from the VDR application and will be developed to
Level D. The VDR boot software is stored in a flash memory device separate from that of the
application software. Once the application software is invoked, the boot software is
deactivated.
VDR Transmit Monitor SCN 10.X
The VDR transmit monitor software is partitioned from the VDR boot and application
software and will be developed to Level C. The VDR transmit monitor software is stored and
executes on a separate microcontroller residing on a different physical circuit card from that
that hosts the VDR boot and application functions.
23-20-06
Page 105
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
SCN 30.X Application Software
Application software version SCN 30.X is categorized as DO-178B Level C (Major). Level
C software is defined by DO-178B as “software whose anomalous behavior, as shown by the
system safety assessment process, would cause or contribute to a failure of system function
resulting in a major failure condition for the aircraft”.
SCN 10.X VHF Data Radio Application Software
VHF Data Radio Application software version SCN 10.X is categorized as DO-178C Level
C (Major). Level C software is defined by DO-178B as “software whose anomalous
behavior, as shown by the system safety assessment process, would cause or contribute to a
failure of system function resulting in a major failure condition for the aircraft”.
3.
Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness, FAR 23.1529,
25.1529, 27.1529 and 29.1529
Our statement in compliance with FAR 23.1529, 25.1529, 27.1529 and 29.1529 follows:
Maintenance Requirements and Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness
SYSTEM:
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation UniLink System
Modification of an aircraft by this Supplemental Type Certificate or Form 337 obligates the
aircraft operator to include the maintenance information provided by this document in the
operator’s Aircraft Maintenance Manual and the operator’s Aircraft Scheduled Maintenance
Program.
(1)
Maintenance Manual information for the UniLink (system description, removal,
installation, testing, etc.) is contained in Universal Avionics Systems Corporation’s
(UASC) Installation Manual 23-20-06.
(2)
Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) part numbers and other necessary part numbers
contained in the installation data package should be placed in the aircraft operator’s
appropriate aircraft Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC). Refer to Equipment
Specifications, F. Electronic Part Marking, of this manual for additional parts
marking information.
(3)
Wiring diagram information contained in the aircraft installation’s data package
should be placed into the aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram
Manuals.
(4)
Installation specific electrical drawings, mechanical drawings and miscellaneous
documents are listed on the data package Master Drawing List.
(5)
The LRU’s location and access requirements are as defined by the installer.
(6)
Revision to this document will be accomplished via Service Bulletins and/or
Installation Manual revision.
(7)
The system performs full self-test BITE at each power on and any failures are
annunciated to the crew.
23-20-06
Page 106
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
A.
Airworthiness Limitations
Scheduled Maintenance Program
Scheduled Maintenance Program tasks to be added to the aircraft operator’s appropriate
aircraft maintenance program are as follows:
(1)
Recommended Periodic Scheduled Servicing Tasks:
None Required
(2)
Recommended Periodic Scheduled Preventative Maintenance Tests/Checks to
determine System Condition and/or Latent Failures:
None Required
(3)
Recommended Periodic Inspections:
None Required
(4)
Recommended Periodic Structural Inspections:
None Required
(5)
Recommended Replacement Interval:
None Required
Unscheduled Maintenance Program
Unscheduled maintenance may include upgrade of the program software contained in the
UniLink, upgrade of the Field Loadable software, or other modifications. If the UniLink is
removed and the software changed, the configuration settings should be checked and
amended as necessary in accordance with the instructions contained in applicable manuals.
B.
Compliance
Universal Avionics has published two compliance reports for the UL-80X systems. These
reports describe installation requirements that must be considered as part of the installation
airworthiness approval. Contact Universal Avionics Product Support to receive the latest
revisions of these reports.
RPRT-2012-1005, AC 20-140A Compliance Report for the UL-80X UniLink LRU with
Software SCN 30.X
RPRT-2012-1007, UniLink UL-80X With Software SCN 30.X Compliance Summary Report
23-20-06
Page 107
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
4.
Environmental Qualification Forms
The environmental categories under which the UniLink is approved (Reference RTCA DO–
160F) are listed on the following Environmental Qualification Forms.
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM
NOMENCLATURE
UniLink UL-801
PART NO.
10801-XX
TSO NUMBER
TSO-C160
MANUFACTURER
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation
3260 East Universal Way
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
Conditions
DO-160F
Section #
Category Description of Conducted Tests
Temperature and Altitude
A2 E1
Inside or outside pressure vessel
−55°C to +70°C
Maximum altitude—70,000 feet
For the E1 levels that, per RTCA/DO-160F, are declared
by the manufacturer, the corresponding levels for A2 are
used.
In-Flight Loss of Cooling
4.5.4
There is no fan on this product.
Temperature Variation
Equipment in non-temperature controlled area of
airplane.
5 degrees/minute
Humidity
Standard humidity
Operational Shocks and
Crash Safety
B, E
Equipment in fixed-wing and helicopters tested for
operational shock and safety.
Vibration
Test category S—Standard
Equipment H—including hermetically sealed, contains
hot spot surfaces and non-spark producing.
Explosion Atmosphere
Environment 2—atmosphere where flammable mixture
exist only because of spillage or leakage.
Waterproofness
10
Equipment subjected to falling water in course of normal
airplane operations.
Fluids Susceptibility
11
Not tested—Fluid contamination not commonly
encountered.
Sand and Dust
12
Not tested—Not subject to blowing sand and dust.
Fungus Resistance
13
Not tested—Equipment not exposed to severe fungus
contamination.
23-20-06
Page 108
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Conditions
DO-160F
Section #
Category Description of Conducted Tests
Salt Fog
14
Not tested—Equipment not subjected to salt
atmosphere.
Magnetic Effect
15
Actual class will be measured. (The distance required to
cause a compass needle deflection of one degree is
measured and must be less than 0.3 meter to be
considered compliant with Category Z.)
Power Input
16
DC generator systems with or without a battery. Not
designated to transmit under emergency electrical
system conditions.
Voltage Spike
17
Equipment installed where high degree of protection
against voltage spikes is required.
Audio Frequency
Conducted Susceptibility
18
—
Induced Signal
Susceptibility
19
ZC
Equipment intended for operation where interference
free operation is required on an aircraft whose primary
power is constant frequency or DC.
Radio Frequency
Susceptibility (Radiated
and Conducted)
20
HIRF conditions are part of normal environment.
Emission of Radio
Frequency Energy
21
—
Pin test performed to level A3; shielded cable bundle test
performed to level J33; unshielded cable bundle test
performed to level G33.
Lightning Induced
Transient Susceptibility
22
A3 G33
J33
Lightning Direct Effects
23
—
Icing
24
—
Electrostatic Discharge
25
—
Flammability
26
—
NOTE: The pin test was performed to level A3 except
for the Ethernet signal pins which were tested to
Level A2.
23-20-06
Page 109
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM
NOMENCLATURE
Configuration Module
PART NO.
108009
TSO NUMBER
TSO-C160
MANUFACTURER
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation
3260 East Universal Way
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
Conditions
DO-160F
Section #
Category Description of Conducted Tests
Temperature and Altitude
A2 E1
Inside or outside pressure vessel
−55°C to +70°C
Maximum altitude—70,000 feet
For the E1 levels that, per RTCA/DO-160F, are declared
by the manufacturer, the corresponding levels for A2 are
used.
In-Flight Loss of Cooling
4.5.4
There is no fan on this product.
Temperature Variation
Equipment in non-temperature controlled area of
airplane.
5 degrees/minute
Humidity
Standard humidity
Operational Shocks and
Crash Safety
B, E
Equipment in fixed-wing and helicopters tested for
operational shock and safety.
Vibration
Test category S—Standard
Equipment H—including hermetically sealed, contains
hot spot surfaces and non-spark producing.
Explosion Atmosphere
Environment 2—atmosphere where flammable mixture
exist only because of spillage or leakage.
Waterproofness
10
Equipment subjected to falling water in course of normal
airplane operations.
Fluids Susceptibility
11
Not tested—Fluid contamination not commonly
encountered.
Sand and Dust
12
Not tested—Not subject to blowing sand and dust.
Fungus Resistance
13
Not tested—Equipment not exposed to severe fungus
contamination.
Salt Fog
14
Not tested—Equipment not subjected to salt
atmosphere.
23-20-06
Page 110
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Conditions
DO-160F
Section #
Category Description of Conducted Tests
Magnetic Effect
15
Actual class will be measured. (The distance required to
cause a compass needle deflection of one degree is
measured and must be less than 0.3 meter to be
considered compliant with Category Z.)
Power Input
16
DC generator systems with or without a battery. Not
designated to transmit under emergency electrical
system conditions.
Voltage Spike
17
Equipment installed where high degree of protection
against voltage spikes is required.
Audio Frequency
Conducted Susceptibility
18
—
Induced Signal
Susceptibility
19
ZC
Equipment intended for operation where interference
free operation is required on an aircraft whose primary
power is constant frequency or DC.
Radio Frequency
Susceptibility (Radiated
and Conducted)
20
HIRF conditions are part of normal environment.
Emission of Radio
Frequency Energy
21
—
Lightning Induced
Transient Susceptibility
22
A3 G33
J33
Pin test performed to level A3; shielded cable bundle test
performed to level J33; unshielded cable bundle test
performed to level G33.
Lightning Direct Effects
23
—
Icing
24
—
Electrostatic Discharge
25
—
Flammability
26
—
23-20-06
Page 111
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
5.
Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Prepare an Airplane Flight Manual Supplement using the following sample as a guide.
NOTE:
Comments in angle brackets, < >, and italics are explanatory only and should not
appear in the final supplement.
AFM Supplement for
Supplement No.
{SAMPLE}
FAA APPROVED
AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
FOR
AIRCRAFT MAKE: __________________________________
AIRCRAFT MODEL: ________________________________
AIRCRAFT REG: ___________________________________
AIRCRAFT S/N: ___________________________________
This supplement must be attached to the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual when the
airplane is modified by the installation of a Universal Avionics Systems Corporation (UASC)
UniLink System, in accordance with STC ____________________________, (or Form 337).
The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the basic manual only in those
areas listed herein. For limitations, procedures, and performance information not contained in
this supplement, consult the appropriate basic Airplane Flight Manual.
FAA Approved:
FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION
<Name of Aircraft Certification Office>
<Address>
FAA Approved Date:
Page 1 of y
23-20-06
Page 112
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
REVISION HISTORY
Sheet
Rev
Description
Approved
1-…..
N/C
Original Document
Date:_________________
______________________
(Name)
(Title)
FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION
(Name of Aircraft Certification Office)
(Address)
23-20-06
Page 113
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Title
General
Limitations
Emergency and Abnormal Procedures
Normal Procedures
Performance Data
23-20-06
Page
12
Page 114
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Section 1 - General
A.
Installation Description
<The following is a sample of how the introduction could read. Fully describe all interfaces
with the UniLink.>
The Universal Avionics Systems Corporation UniLink installation is interfaced with up to
three UASC Flight Management Systems.
The UniLink contains software 30.X.
Section 2 - Limitations
A.
Operator’s Manual
The UniLink Operator’s Manual, report number 23-20-06.01, must be available to the flight
crew when UniLink is to be used during flight. <If FANS is enabled, this report number is
23-20-06.02.>.
B.
Limitations
When a UniLink CDU/MCDU message display screen is labeled “Unverified” or “AOC”,
the Aircraft Communications and Reporting System (ACARS) is unable to ensure that
message content was not corrupted during transmission. Unverified messages must be
restricted to those that do not create an unsafe condition if:
(1)
(2)
(3)
The message is not received.
The message is delivered to the wrong recipient.
The message content may be frequently corrupted.
NOTE: Unverified message contents should be treated as advisory only.
Section 3 - Emergency and Abnormal Procedures
No change to FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
Page x of y
23-20-06
Page 115
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Section 4 - Normal Procedures
Normal operating procedures are outlined in the UniLink Operator’s Manual, report number
23-20-06.01. <If FANS is enabled, this report number is 23-20-06.02.>.
Section 5 – Performance Data
No change to FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
23-20-06
Page 116
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Equipment Specifications
1.
UniLink Equipment Specifications
A.
UniLink Part Number Matrix
10801 - XX
Basic Part
Number
Hardware Variant
00 = Baseline
23-20-06
Page 201
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
B.
UniLink Installation Kit
(1)
Installation Kit P/N K12030-1
Quantity
Part Number
Description
13636-93601-2
or
93601-2
Rack, ARINC 600, 1 MCU (Barry Controls)
MS24693C4
Screw, Recessed, Cres, 100° CSK, 4-40 x 3/8”
1219
Rack Connector
MS51957-20
Screw, 4-40 x 7/8”, Cres (for configuration module)
MS21083C04
Nut, 4-40, Cres, Self Lock (for configuration module)
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for the listed items in the installation kits.
C.
Power Specifications
The UniLink will continue to operate with a 19.0V power input.
Current/Power
(Amps @ VDC)/Watts
Component
Model
22.0V
Min
Part No.
STBY
UL-801
10801-XX
NOTE: •
•
D.
1A;
22.0W
27.5V
Nominal
TX
3.5A typical
@ 77W
7A
maximum
@ 154W
STBY
0.9A;
24.8W
32.0V
Max
TX
STBY
TX
22.0V 27.5V
Min Nominal
32.0V
Max
3.5A
typical @
112W 2.5A @ 2.5A @ 2.5A @
0.7A;
22.4W
<100ms <100ms <100ms
7A
7A
maximum
maximum
@ 224W
@ 192W
3.5A typical
@ 96W
The UL-801 is designed to operate using a 5A circuit breaker.
The UL-801 VDR Transmit Message Duty Cycle is < 750ms.
Equipment Weights
Component
E.
Inrush Current
(Amps @ VDC)
Weight
UL-801 UniLink
Approximately 4.5 Lbs.
Equipment Rack
11.5 Oz.
Connector
5.6 Oz.
Configuration Module
0.5 Oz.
VHF Antenna Specifications
Antenna Specifications
Coax Cable Attenuation
Impedance
Frequency Range
Power Rating
< 3 dB
50 Ohms
118.000 – 136.975
15W - 35W
23-20-06
Page 202
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
F.
Electronic Part Marking
UniLink supports Electronic Part Marking and is in compliance with FAA Order Number
8110.49 which allows verification of the installed part number and software versions by
accessing pages on the connected display device such as a CDU or MCDU. The UniLink
nameplate, as shown below, makes reference to the Installation Manual (IM) where such
information can be found.
Per FAA Order number 8110.49, there should be a process in place to ensure that
maintenance personnel record loaded Field Loadable Software (FLS) part number in the
necessary maintenance logs.
When new software is loaded into the unit, it is the maintenance personnel’s responsibility to
ensure that the software part number has been logged and verified before the unit/aircraft is
returned to service.
Changes to software part number, version, and/or operational characteristics should be
reflected in the Operator’s Manual, Aircraft Flight Manual, Aircraft Flight Manual
Supplement, and/or any other appropriate document.
AIRBORNE DATALINK
P/N 10800-00
UL-800
SOFTWARE VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION
DO - 178B
LEVEL C
SCN ELECTRONIC MARKING
SEE IM 23-20-05
TSO-C160 (Dev)
EQUIPMENT CLASS
SEE IM 23-20-05
MANUFACTURED BY
TUCSON AZ 85756 U.S.A.
23-20-06
Page 203
15 December 2011
2
7.6±.1
23-20-06
(4.2)
2 PO S ITIO N AR IN C 600 C O N N E C TO R P O LA R IZATIO N KEYS
TO C O D E #08 .
1. W EIG H T 10801: 4.54 LBS ± 5%
CG
(8.3)
15.2±.1
CG
CG
(1)
(.5)
G.
1.1±.1
UL-801 Installation Manual
Equipment Drawings
UL-801 (P/N 10801-XX) Outline Drawing
Page 204
15 December 2011
7.00
6.020
23-20-06
0.545
1.965
CONNECTOR (REF)
1.23
6 PLACES
x 100° CSK
0.230 ±0.005 DIA,
APPROX REAR
OF UNIT
12.220
12.720
9.000
1.77
±0.02
2 PLACES
(MS14108-4)
RETAINER, FRONT
0.390 ±0.005 DIA,
x 100° CSK
2.50
(2)
14.92
UL-801 Installation Manual
Rack Drawing (P/N 13636-93601-2)
Page 205
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(3)
Configuration Module (P/N 108009)
.875"
.282"
1.200"
(4)
Configuration Module Installation Detail
108009 CONFIGURATION MODULE
CONNECTOR
UL801 RACK CONNECTOR KEYING
ARINC 600 #08 POLARIZATION
(BLACK SEGMENT INDICATES RACK POST)
4-40 SCREWS AND
NUTS
NOTE: The darkened portion of the rack connector above indicates the extended part of the key;
the light portion indicates the key hole.
23-20-06
Page 206
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
H.
Signal Specifications
(1)
Digital Inputs
(a)
FMS ARINC 429 Broadcast Data
Label
Description
Format
UNS
HS429-1
TX Rate
(ms)
ARINC
429 HS
TX Rate
(ms)
Notes
102
Selected Altitude
BNR
200
N/A
Crew selected via CP.
116
Cross-track Distance
BNR
100
100
147
Magnetic Variation
BNR
1000
500
150
UTC
BNR
1000
1000
N/A
203
Pressure Altitude
BNR
100
1000
N/A
204
Baro-Corrected Altitude
BNR
100
500
ADC dependent.
Baro-corrected altitude is
output if available.
205
Mach
BNR
500
N/A
N/A
206
Indicated Air Speed
BNR
500
(NOTE 2)
N/A
N/A
210
True Air Speed
BNR
100
500
N/A
212
Altitude Rate
BNR
100
N/A
N/A
213
Static Air Temperature
BNR
500
1000
N/A
231
Actual Navigation
Performance
BCD
500
500
N/A
233
Selected Cross-track
BCD
500
N/A
Crew selected offset from the
flight plan.
251
Along Track Distance to
WPT
BNR
1000
500
N/A
252
Estimated Time to Waypoint
BNR
500
500
N/A
260
Date
BCD
1000
500
N/A
270
Status
DSC
100
500
N/A
272
Active Leg Attributes
DSC
100
N/A
Contains flight phase data.
310
Present Latitude
BNR
100
100
N/A
311
Present Longitude
BNR
100
100
N/A
312
Ground Speed
BNR
100
500
N/A
313
True Track Angle
BNR
1000
500
N/A
314
True Heading
BNR
100
100
N/A
315
Wind Speed
BNR
1000
500
N/A
316
True Wind Angle
BNR
1000
500
N/A
320
Magnetic Heading
BNR
100
(NOTE 1)
100
(NOTE 2)
N/A
Cross-track distance is
relative to SXTK
TX rate ARINC 429 HS
bus = 100 ms.
23-20-06
Page 207
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Label
Description
Format
UNS
HS429-1
TX Rate
(ms)
ARINC
429 HS
TX Rate
(ms)
100
(NOTE 2)
N/A
1000
325
Roll Angle
BNR
370
WGS-84/GNSS Height
BNR
100
(NOTE 1)
1000
371
Equipment ID
DSC
1000
Notes
N/A
N/A
NOTE: 1. When in DEMO mode, the label is not transmitted.
2. Label is output during DEMO mode when IRS ATT OUTPUTS is set active.
When IRS ATT OUTPUTS is set inactive, these labels are inhibited during DEMO mode.
(b)
702A FMS ARINC 429 Broadcast Data
Label
Description
Format
Transmission Rate (ms)
203
Pressure Altitude
BNR
1000
210
True Air Speed
BNR
500
213
Static Air Temperature
BNR
1000
314
True Heading
BNR
100
315
Wind Speed
BNR
500
316
True Wind Angle
BNR
500
Format
Transmission Rate (ms)
DSC
1000
Format
Transmission Rate (ms)
DSC
1000
(c)
ARINC 741 SDU Broadcast Data
Label
270
(d)
Description
Status
ARINC 740/744A Printer Broadcast Data
Label
350
(e)
Description
Printer Status
DHC8-S400 IOP Bus #1 and IOP Bus #2 Broadcast Data ARINC 429
Label
Description
Format
Source
107
Selected Flap Position
BNR
FCU
164
Radio Altimeter 1
BNR
RA 1
164
Radio Altimeter 2
BNR
RA 2
176
Left Engine Fuel Temperature
BNR
FMU 1 (IOP 1)
176
Right Engine Fuel Temperature
BNR
FMU 2 (IOP 2)
204
Baro Alt 1 (cor)
BNR
ADU 1
204
Baro Alt 2 (cor)
BNR
ADU 2
205
Mach Number 1
BNR
ADU 1
205
Mach Number 2
BNR
ADU 2
206
Calib Airspeed 1
BNR
ADU 1
206
Calib Airspeed 2
BNR
ADU 2
23-20-06
Page 208
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Label
Description
Format
Source
210
True Airspeed 1 (TAS)
BNR
ADU 1
210
True Airspeed 2 (TAS)
BNR
ADU 2
211
Total Air Temp 1
BNR
ADU 1
211
Total Air Temp 2
BNR
ADU 2
212
Altitude Rate 1
BNR
ADU 1
212
Altitude Rate 2
BNR
ADU 2
213
Static Air Temp 1 (SAT)
BNR
ADU 1
213
Static Air Temp 2 (SAT)
BNR
ADU 2
244
Left Fuel Flow
BNR
Left Fuel Flow Meter
244
Right Fuel Flow
BNR
Right Fuel Flow Meter
245
Left Gas Gen Speed (NL)
BNR
FADEC 1 (A/B)
245
Right Gas Gen Speed (NL)
BNR
FADEC 2 (A/B)
246
Left Gas Gen Speed (NH)
BNR
FADEC 1 (A/B)
246
Right Gas Gen Speed (NH)
BNR
FADEC 2 (A/B)
247
Total Fuel Qty Lbs
BNR
FQC
256
Left Tank Fuel Qty Lbs
BNR
FQC
256
Right Tank Fuel Qty Lbs
BNR
FQC
270
IOP 1 Discrete Word 1
BNR
IOP 1
270
IOP 2 Discrete Word 2
BNR
IOP 2
316
Left Engine Oil Temp
BNR
FADEC 1 (A/B)
316
Right Engine Oil Temp
BNR
FADEC 2 (A/B)
317
Left Eng Oil Pressure
BNR
Left Eng Oil Pres Meter (IOP 1)
317
Right Eng Oil Pressure
BNR
Right Eng Oil Pres Meter (IOP 2)
325
Roll Altitude 1
BNR
AHRS 1
325
Roll Altitude 2
BNR
AHRS 2
336
Left Engine Torque
BNR
FADEC 1 (A/B)
336
Right Engine Torque
BNR
FADEC 2 (A/B)
345
Left ITT
BNR
FADEC 1 (A/B)
345
Right ITT
BNR
FADEC 2 (A/B)
346
Left Propeller
BNR
FADEC 1 (A/B)
346
Right Propeller
BNR
FADEC 2 (A/B)
(f)
ARINC 739A MCDU Broadcast Data
Label
Description
Format
Transmission Rate (ms)
172
System Identification Word
DSC
1000
270
MCDU Status Word #1
DSC
1000
377
MCDU Identifier Word
DSC
1000
23-20-06
Page 209
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(g)
ARINC 743 GNSS Broadcast Data
Label
Description
Transmission Rate (ms)
076
GNSS Altitude
BNR
1000
103
GNSS Track Angle
BNR
1000
110
GNSS Latitude
BNR
1000
111
GNSS Longitude
BNR
1000
112
GNSS Ground Speed
BNR
1000
150
UTC Time
BNR
1000
165
Vertical Velocity
BNR
1000
260
Date
BCD
1000
273
GNSS Sensor Status
DSC
1000
Format
Transmission Rate (ms)
DSC
1000
(h)
604 CMC ARINC 429 Broadcast data
Label
270
(2)
Format
Description
Status
Digital Outputs
(a)
Standard UniLink Broadcast Data ARINC 429
Label
Description
Format
Transmission Rate (ms)
172
System Identification Word
DSC
1000
214
ICAO Aircraft Address Word #1
DSC
1000
216
ICAO Aircraft Address Word #2
DSC
1000
270
Status Word #1
DSC
1000
276
Status Word #2
DSC
1000
350
Maintenance Word #1
DSC
1000
351
Maintenance Word #2
DSC
1000
23-20-06
Page 210
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
I.
HS-429-1 Bus – UniLink
NOTE:
Although there are HS-429-1 labels available for GLS, TAWS, and
Vision-1, only the labels for UniLink are shown in the following table.
Label
Definition
Format
TX Rate
Update
Rate
150
Greenwich Mean Time
BNR
1000 ms
204
Barometric Altitude (429 GAMA)
BNR
100 ms
213
Static Air Temperature
BNR
234
Poll Word (ENQ) from MDF
100 ms
500 ms
As required
234
Clear to Send Word (CTS) from MDF
234
Synchronization Word (SYN) from MDF
234
Button-Push Word (BPW) from MDF
234
ACK Word from User System from MDF
234
NAK Word from User System from MDF
235
Full Data Word
235
Partial Data Word
235
Protocol Word
235
Solo Word
235
Start of Transmission
235
End of Transmission
252
Time to Go (429 GAMA)
BNR
500 ms
260
Date
BCD
1000 ms
261
GPS Discrete Word 1 (429 GAMA)
DSC
1000 ms
310
Present Position Latitude
BNR
100 ms
311
Present Position Longitude
BNR
100 ms
312
Ground Speed
BNR
100 ms
315
Wind Speed
BNR
1000 ms
316
True Wind Speed
BNR
1000 ms
340
Present Position Fine Latitude
BNR
100 ms
100 ms
341
Present Position Fine Longitude
BNR
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
500 ms
1000 ms and as required
23-20-06
1 per sec.
100 ms
Page 211
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
J.
Configurable LRUs
Item
Configurable LRU
Qty Supported by UL-80X (I/O Type)
Input Data Equipment
A743 GPS/A743A GNSS
1 (A429)
DHC8 IOP
2 (A429)
Digital ADC
2 (A429)
UASC FMS/CDU
3 (A429)
A702 FMS
3 (A429)
604 CMC
1 (A429)
VM CMC
1 (A429)
Generic Device
1 (A429)
Display Equipment
UASC A739A MCDU
3 (A429)
10
Standard A739A MCDU
3 (A429)
11
EFI-890R
2 (RS-422)
12
MFD-640
1 (RS-422)
13
CDU
3 (RS-422)
14
Remote CDU/MCDU (UASC)
2 (RS-422)
Transmission Media
15
Internal VHF Radio (VDR) (UL-801 only)
1 (A429)
16
A750 VDR (UL-800 only)
1 (NA)
17
A741 SDU
1 (A429)
18
Telephony
1 (RS-232)
NOTE 1: The ADC interface is used as a supplement to FANS required air data that was not
supplied by the FMS such as Mach Number and IAS. The ADC interface can still be used
to supplement this FMS data in the case the data from the FMS may be invalid or NCD.
NOTE 2: A maximum of six total display devices can be configured at a time, one high-resolution
device on each of two high-res ports and up to four low-resolution devices on the low-res
port. An RCDU has a separate display processor from the master CDU/MCDU that it is
connected to.
NOTE 3: The diagnostic RS-232 port is a dedicated connection and is not a configurable item of the
general purpose RS-232/422 serial channels.
NOTE 4: The AirCell ground-based cellular network has been decommissioned by AirCell.
"Iridium/AirCell" equipment will continue to be supported; the "AirCell" only equipment
support has been removed.
NOTE 5: UL-80X does not support tip/ring telephony devices (Magnastar, UASC T –T Aero-I, AirCell
only). Serial telephony devices are supported (Iridium, UASC T –T Aero-M).
23-20-06
Page 212
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Installation and Wiring
1.
Installation Considerations for UniLink Mounting
A.
UniLink Mounting
The UniLink may be installed inside or outside of the pressure vessel. The UniLink must not
be mounted next to excessive heat producing equipment or in such a way as to impede
normal convection cooling and it must not be mounted with its rear connector up. The
UniLink may be mounted in any rotational direction in an upright position. The UniLink rack
must be grounded to the airframe by use of proper bonding methods. This provides a positive
grounding of the rack to which data shields may be connected.
2.
Wiring Diagrams
The following wiring diagrams show connections between the UL-801 and other avionics
equipment used in typical installations. Refer to the appropriate FMS technical manual for
additional required wiring.
These diagrams include our suggested choices for configurable discretes and
communications ports but the choice is left up to the discretion of the installer. Mark the
configuration worksheets to show your actual installation. Configuration worksheets are
found in the System Data Installation section of this manual.
NOTE:
The FMS must have SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later in order to utilize FANS.
23-20-06
Page 301
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
A.
UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
#1 UNS-1C
(P/N 1017-XX-2XX)
MP
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
1B
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
1C
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
1A
1D
9A
9B
TP
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
P1
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
P2
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
9C
9D
#2 UNS-1C
(P/N 1017-XX-2XX)
MP
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
2B
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
2C
2D
----CONTINUED----
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
2A
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
P1
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
P2
23-20-06
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
Page 302
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801XX)
----CONTINUED----
VHF ANTENNA
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
20
POWER GND
20
CHASSIS GND
16
5A
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
+28 VDC
DATA CLK
11C
24
YELLOW
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
UNS1C, P/N 1017XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). UNS1C, P/N 1017XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 INPUT DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
23-20-06
Page 303
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
B.
UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C+
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
#1 UNS-1C+
(P/N 10172-XX-2XX)
MP
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
1B
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
1C
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
1A
1D
9A
TP
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
P1
9B
9C
9D
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
P2
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
#2 UNS-1C+
(P/N 10172-XX-2XX)
MP
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
2B
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
2C
2D
----CONTINUED----
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
2A
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
P1
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
P2
23-20-06
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
Page 304
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
VHF ANTENNA
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
20
POWER GND
20
20
CHASSIS GND
16
5A
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
+28 VDC
DATA CLK
11C
24
YELLOW
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
UNS1C+, P/N 10172XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). UNS1C+, P/N 10172XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 INPUT DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
23-20-06
Page 305
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
C.
UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1E
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
#1 UNS-1E
(P/N 2017-XX-2XX)
MP
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
1B
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
1C
1A
1D
9A
9B
TP
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
P1
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
P2
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
9C
9D
2B
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
2C
----CONTINUED----
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
#2 UNS-1E
(P/N 2017-XX-2XX)
MP
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
2A
2D
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
P1
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
P2
23-20-06
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
Page 306
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
VHF ANTENNA
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
20
POWER GND
20
20
CHASSIS GND
16
5A
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
+28 VDC
DATA CLK
11C
24
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
YELLOW
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
UNS1E, P/N 2017XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). UNS1E, P/N 2017XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
23-20-06
Page 307
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
D.
UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Csp
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
1B
1C
1A
1D
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
9A
9B
9C
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
50
49
48
47
9D
2B
2C
HS ARINC
429 TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
#2 UNS-1Csp
(P/N 1019-XX-2XX)
2A
ARINC
429 RX
P2
MP
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
TP
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
#1 UNS-1Csp
(P/N 1019-XX-2XX)
MP
2D
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
P2
50
49
48
47
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
----CONTINUED----
23-20-06
Page 308
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
VHF ANTENNA
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
20
POWER GND
20
CHASSIS GND
16
+28 VDC
5A
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
DATA CLK
11C
24
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
YELLOW
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
UNS1Csp, P/N 1019XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). UNS1Csp, P/N 1019XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
23-20-06
Page 309
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
E.
UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Esp
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
1B
1C
1A
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
1D
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
9A
50
9B
49
9C
48
47
9D
2B
2C
HS ARINC
429 TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
#2 UNS-1Esp
(P/N 2019-XX-2XX)
2A
ARINC
429 RX
P2
MP
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
TP
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
#1 UNS-1Esp
(P/N 2019-XX-2XX)
MP
2D
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
P2
50
49
48
47
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
----CONTINUED----
23-20-06
Page 310
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
VHF ANTENNA
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
20
POWER GND
20
20
CHASSIS GND
16
5A
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
+28 VDC
DATA CLK
11C
24
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
YELLOW
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
UNS1Esp, P/N 2019XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). UNS1Esp, P/N 2019XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
23-20-06
Page 311
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
F.
UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
POWER GND
20
CHASSIS GND
16
20
+28 VDC
5A
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
DATA CLK
11C
24
YELLOW
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
#1 UNS-1D
(P/N 1192-X0-111XXX)
1A
1B
1C
1D
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
2B
2C
2A
2D
ARINC 429
RX
HS ARINC 429
TX
#2 UNS-1D
(P/N 1192-X0-111XXX)
MP
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
ARINC 429
RX
HS ARINC 429
TX
----CONTINUED----
23-20-06
Page 312
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5” FPCDU/MCDU
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
P3
TP
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9A
9B
9C
9D
SHIELD GND
P3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
SHIELD GND
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE
UNS-1D INSTALLATION KIT.
THE 5 FPCDU, P/N 1018-2-X10, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). OTHER 5 FPCDUs, P/N 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY DISPLAYS.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER.
23-20-06
Page 313
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
G.
UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D+
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
POWER GND
20
CHASSIS GND
16
20
+28 VDC
5A
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
DATA CLK
11C
24
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
CONFIG
MODULE
MP
12B
DISCRETE INPUT #3
DISCRETE INPUT #4
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
1A
1B
1C
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
12C
YELLOW
#1 UNS-1D+
(P/N 11922-X0-111XXX)
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
#2 UNS-1D+
(P/N 11922-X0-111XXX)
2B
2C
2A
2D
HS ARINC 429 TX
1D
MP
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
ARINC 429 RX
ARINC 429 RX
HS ARINC 429 TX
----CONTINUED----
23-20-06
Page 314
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5” FPCDU/MCDU
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED---P3
TP
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
9A
9B
9C
SHIELD GND
9D
P3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
SHIELD GND
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE
UNS-1D+ INSTALLATION KIT.
THE 5 FPCDU, P/N 1018-2-X10, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). OTHER 5 FPCDUs, P/N 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY DISPLAYS.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER.
23-20-06
Page 315
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
H.
UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1F
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
POWER GND
20
CHASSIS GND
16
20
+28 VDC
5A
CONFIGURATION MODULE
(P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
DATA CLK
11C
24
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
MP
YELLOW
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
1A
1B
1C
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
HS ARINC 429 TX
1D
#2 UNS-F
(P/N 2192-X0-111XXX)
MP
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
#1 UNS-1F
(P/N 2192-X0-111XXX)
ARINC 429 RX
2A
2B
2C
2D
ARINC 429 RX
HS ARINC 429 TX
----CONTINUED----
23-20-06
Page 316
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5” FPCDU/MCDU
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED---P3
TP
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
9A
9B
9C
9D
SHIELD GND
P3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
SHIELD GND
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE
UNS-1D+ INSTALLATION KIT.
THE 5 FPCDU, P/N 1018-2-X10, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). OTHER 5 FPCDUs, P/N 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY DISPLAYS.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER.
23-20-06
Page 317
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
I.
UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC INPUT
POWER GND
CHASSIS GND
20
20
16
+28 VDC
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 10651)
TP
DATA CLK
CONFIG
MODULE
+5 VDC
DATA I/O
GND
11C
24
YELLLOW
11D
24
RED
12C
24
BLUE
12D
24
BROWN
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
#1 UNS-1K
(P/N 1116-XX-111X)
ARINC 429 Tx #1
(FMS 1)
ARINC 429 Rx #1
(FMS 1)
1A
1B
1C
1D
ARINC 429 Rx #2
(FMS 2)
2B
2C
2A
2D
HS ARINC
429 Tx
#2 UNS-1K
(P/N 1116-XX-111X)
MP
ARINC 429 Tx #2
(FMS 2)
ARINC
429 Rx
ARINC
429 Rx
HS ARINC
429 Tx
----CONTINUED----
23-20-06
Page 318
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
P3
TP
#1 4" FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X)
9A
9B
9C
9D
SHIELD GND
P3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
#2 4" FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X)
SHIELD GND
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE
UNS-1K INSTALLATION KIT.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
23-20-06
Page 319
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
J.
UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K+
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
20
POWER GND
20
CHASSIS GND
16
5A
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
+28 VDC
DATA CLK
11C
24
YELLLOW
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
1A
1B
1C
#1 UNS-1K+
(P/N 11162-XX-111X)
1D
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
2B
2C
2A
HS ARINC
429 TX
#2 UNS-1K+
(P/N 11162-XX-111X)
MP
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
ARINC
429 RX
2D
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
----CONTINUED----
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
UNS1K+ SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT ONLY (NO GRAPHICS).
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
23-20-06
Page 320
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
P3
TP
#1 4" FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X)
9A
9B
9C
9D
SHIELD GND
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
#2 4" FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X)
P3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
SHIELD GND
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE
UNS-1K INSTALLATION KIT.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
23-20-06
Page 321
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
K.
UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1L
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
20
POWER GND
20
CHASSIS GND
16
5A
+28 VDC
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
DATA CLK
11C
24
YELLLOW
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
#1 UNS-1L
(P/N 2116-XX-111X)
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
1B
1C
1A
1D
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
2A
2B
2C
2D
HS ARINC
429 TX
#2 UNS-1L
(P/N 2116-XX-111X)
MP
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
ARINC
429 RX
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
UNS1L SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT ONLY (NO GRAPHICS).
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
23-20-06
Page 322
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
L.
UL-801 to UNS-1Ew
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1005.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS.
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
MP
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
1B
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
1C
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
#1 UNS-1Ew
(P/N 3017-XX-2XX)
1A
1D
9A
9B
9C
9D
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
P1
TP
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
P2
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
2B
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
2C
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
#2 UNS-1Ew
(P/N 3017-XX-2XX)
MP
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
2A
2D
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
P1
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
P2
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
DISCRETE OUTPUT
+28 VDC
DISCRETE OUTPUT
15
11
10 DISCRETE OUTPUT
CPDLC
CNECT
----CONTINUED----
23-20-06
Page 323
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
VHF ANTENNA
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
20
POWER GND
20
20
CHASSIS GND
16
5A
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
+28 VDC
DATA CLK
11C
24
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
YELLOW
12
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
14
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
13
NOTES: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
UNS1Ew SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS USING RS-422 DISPLAY DATA.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D IN LIEU OF MP2C AND MP2D SHOWN ABOVE.
CONFIGURE: SERIAL LOW RESOLUTION DISPLAY.
WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT.
ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL.
CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT.
10
OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT).
11
OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED.
12
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
13
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
14
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
15
WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED.
23-20-06
Page 324
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
M.
UL-801 to UNS-1Espw
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS.
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1Espw
(P/N 3019-XX-2XX)
MP
1B
1C
1A
1D
15
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
9A
50
9B
49
9C
48
9D
47
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
2B
2C
2A
HS ARINC
429 TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
#2 UNS-1Espw
(P/N 3019-XX-2XX)
MP
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
ARINC
429 RX
P2
TP
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
2D
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
P2
50
49
48
47
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
DISCRETE OUTPUT
+28 VDC
14
DISCRETE OUTPUT
10
DISCRETE OUTPUT
CPDLC
CNECT
----CONTINUED----
23-20-06
Page 325
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
VHF ANTENNA
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
20
POWER GND
20
CHASSIS GND
16
5A
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
+28 VDC
DATA CLK
11C
24
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
YELLOW
11
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
13
12
NOTES: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
UNS1Espw SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS USING RS-422 DISPLAY DATA.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE
WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT.
ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL.
CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT.
OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT).
10
11
OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
12
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
13
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
14
WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED.
23-20-06
Page 326
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
N.
UL-801 to UNS-1Lw
NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS.
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
CONFIG
MODULE
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
TP
DATA CLK
11C
24
YELLLOW
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1Lw
(P/N 3116-XX-111X)
1A
1B
1C
1D
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
#2 UNS-1Lw
(P/N 3116-XX-111X)
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
2B
2C
2A
2D
ARINC
429 RX
HS ARINC
429 TX
VHF ANTENNA
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
20
POWER GND
20
CHASSIS GND
16
5A
+28 VDC
DISCRETE OUTPUT
+28 VDC
11
10 DISCRETE OUTPUT
13
12 DISCRETE OUTPUT
14
CPDLC
CNECT
NOTES: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
NOTES ARE CONTINED ON THE NEXT PAGE.
23-20-06
Page 327
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
NOTES continued
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
UNS1Lw SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS USING RS-422 DISPLAY DATA.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D IN LIEU OF MP2C AND MP2D SHOWN ABOVE.
WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT.
ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL.
10
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL.
11
CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT.
12
OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT).
13
OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED.
14
WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED.
23-20-06
Page 328
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
O.
UL-801 with FANS to UNS-1Fw
(1)
Sheet 1 of 2
NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS.
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
CONFIGURATION MODULE
(P/N 108009)
TP
CONFIG
MODULE
DATA CLK
11C
24
+5 VDC
11D
24
RED
DATA I/O
12C
24
BLUE
GND
12D
24
BROWN
MP
YELLOW
DISCRETE INPUT #3
12B
PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4
12C
DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1Fw
2192-X0-111XXX
1A
1B
1C
ARINC 429 RX
HS ARINC 429 TX
1D
#2 UNS-Fw
2192-X0-111XXX
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
2B
2C
2A
ARINC 429 RX
2D
HS ARINC 429 TX
VHF ANTENNA
BP
VHF ANTENNA
+28 VDC POWER
20
POWER GND
20
CHASSIS GND
16
+28 VDC
5A
DISCRETE OUTPUT
DISCRETE OUTPUT
+28 VDC
10
15
12
11
DISCRETE OUTPUT
CPDLC
CNECT
----CONTINUED----
23-20-06
Page 329
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5” FPCDU/MCDU
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED---P3
TP
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
9A
9B
9C
9D
SHIELD GND
13
14
13
14
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX
16
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
P3
NOTES: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX
SHIELD GND
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX
THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D IN LIEU OF MP2C AND MP2D SHOWN ABOVE.
WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT.
ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL.
10
CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT.
11
OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT).
12
OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED.
13
BOTH THE 4 AND 5 FPCDUs, P/Ns 1117-2-X1X AND 1018-2-X1X, SUPPORT BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY DATA).
OTHER 4 AND 5 FPCDUs, P/Ns 1117-X-X00 AND 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY.
14
BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER.
15
WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED.
16
CONFIGURE AS A LO-RES DISPLAY.
23-20-06
Page 330
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
P.
UL-801 FANS Discretes (WAAS FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later)
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
ANNUNCIATOR
P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC
DISCRETE OUTPUT
DISCRETE OUTPUT
DISCRETE OUTPUT
CPDLC
CNECT
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL.
ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE
WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS
CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR.
OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT).
OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED.
23-20-06
Page 331
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Q.
UL-801 to EFI-890R – High Resolution
#1 NAV DISPLAY
(P/N 8904-XXXXX-XX)
P1
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
16
27
RS-422 RX
TP
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #4
7A
7B
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #4
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #5
7C
7D
6A
6B
6C
6D
47
46
RS-422 TX
RETURN/SHIELD
#2 NAV DISPLAY
(P/N 8904-XXXXX-XX )
P1
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #5
RETURN/SHIELD
16
27
RS-422 RX
RETURN/SHIELD
47
46
RS-422 TX
RETURN/SHIELD
SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT AND CONFIGURE THE PORT FOR HI-RES DISPLAY 1. PORT #4 IS USED HERE AS AN EXAMPLE.
EFI-890Rs ARE HIGH RESOLUTION DEVICES, ONE DEVICE MAXIMUM PER PORT. THEREFORE, THE UNILINK MUST BE CONFIGURED AS DEFINED
BELOW. A MAXIMUM OF TWO HIGH-RESOLUTION DISPLAYS CAN BE INSTALLED AND CONFIGURED.
SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT AND CONFIGURE THE PORT FOR HI-RES DISPLAY 2. PORT #5 IS USED HERE AS AN EXAMPLE.
USE ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT. PORTS DEPICTED ARE FOR EXAMPLE.
UNILINK CONFIGURATION
I/O CONFIG:
SELECT SERIAL
PORT 4 SELECT HI-RES DISPLAY 1
PORT 5 SELECT HI-RES DISPLAY 2
GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION
CDU/MFD BAUD RATE
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON
EFI-890R ND #1 CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU
RS-422 RX CHANNEL MENU
J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 PRIMARY 38.4
J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1
RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU
J1-47, J1-46(A,B) TX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 38.4
SELECT 19.2 KBS
SELECT CDU, HR1
SELECT CDU, HR2
UNILINK NODE ID: 35
EXAMPLE 1
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, RCDU, HR1
EXAMPLE 2
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, FPCDU, HR1
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, HR2
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, HR2
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
EFI-890R ND #2 CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU
RS-422 RX CHANNEL MENU
J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 PRIMARY 38.4
J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1
RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU
J1-47, J1-46(A,B) TX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 38.4
UNILINK NODE ID: 45
ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WILL RESULT IN AN ERROR MESSAGE.
23-20-06
Page 332
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
R.
UL-801 to MFD-640 – High Resolution (MFD SCN 1011.4.8 or later)
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
TP
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #4
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #4
MFD-640
P/N 6402-XXXXX-XX
P1
7A
58
7B
57
7C
47
7D
46
RS-422 RX #1
RS-422 TX #1
RETURN/SHIELD
NOTE: UNILINK HIGH RESOLUTION CONFGURATION SETTINGS REQUIRE MFD-640-SCN 1011.4.8 OR LATER.
USE ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT. PORTS DEPICTED ARE EXAMPLES. A MAXIMUM OF TWO HIGH-RESOLUTION DISPLAYS MAY BE USED.
THE UNILINK HIGH RESOLUTION MFD MUST BE CONFIGURED AS DEFINED BELOW.
UNILINK CONFIGURATION
I/O CONFIG:
SELECT SERIAL
PORT 4
SELECT HI-RES DISPLAY 1
MFD-640 CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU
UNILINK NODE ID: 35
BAUD RATE: 38.4K
GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION
CDU/MFD BAUD RATE
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON
SELECT 19.2 KBPS
SEE THE EXAMPLES BELOW
SEE THE EXAMPLES BELOW
SEE THE EXAMPLES BELOW
EXAMPLE 1
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, RCDU, HR1
EXAMPLE 2
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, FPCDU, HR1
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, HR2
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, HR2
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
RS-422 MENU
J1-58, J1-57 RX FUNC: UNILINK PRIMARY
RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1
RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU
J1-47, J1-46 TX FUNC: UNILINK
J1-58, 47, J1-57,46 SPEED: 38400
ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WILL RESULT IN AN ERROR MESSAGE.
23-20-06
Page 333
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
S.
UL-801 to Remote CDU (RCDU) – Low Resolution
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
RS-422 TX
RS-422 RX
TP
4 or 5 FPCDU #1
J3
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
GROUND
4 or 5 FPCDU #2
J3
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
GROUND
4 or 5 FPCDU #3
J3
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
GROUND
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
RCDU
CAUTION:
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
GROUND
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
NOTES:
1.
A MAXIMUM OF FOUR DISPLAY DEVICES MAY BE CONNECTED AND CONFIGURED. THE FPCDUs SHOWN ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. FMS CDUs OR ANY
OTHER DISPLAY DEVICE IN ANY COMBINATION CAN ALSO BE USED.
SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT (PORT 4 RECOMMENDED) AND CONFIGURE FOR LOW RESOLUTION:
UNILINK CONFIGURATION
I/O CONFIG:
SELECT AND CONFIGURE PORT AS LO-RES DISPLAY
GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION
CDU/MFD BAUD RATE
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON
SELECT 19.2 KBPS
SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 1
SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 2
SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 3
CONFIGURATION NOTES
1. CONFIGURE RCDU HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #1 CDU.
2. CONFIGURE RCDU HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #2 CDU.
3. CONFIGURE RCDU HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #3 CDU.
EXAMPLE 1
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, RCDU
EXAMPLE 2
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, FPCDU
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, MFD-LR
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WOULD EXCEED THE TOTAL OF FOUR DEVICES AND CREATE AN ERROR MESSAGE.
23-20-06
Page 334
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
T.
UL-801 to MFD-640 - Low Resolution (MFD-640 SCN 1011.4.7 or
earlier)
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
RS-422 TX
RS-422 RX
TP
4 or 5 FPCDU #1
J3
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
GROUND
4 or 5 FPCDU #2
J3
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
GROUND
4 or 5 FPCDU #3
J3
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
GROUND
MFD-640
CAUTION:
NOTES:
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
GROUND
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
1.
A MAXIMUM OF FOUR DISPLAY DEVICES MAY BE CONNECTED AND CONFIGURED. THE FPCDUs SHOWN ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. FMS CDUs OR ANY
OTHER DISPLAY DEVICE IN ANY COMBINATION CAN ALSO BE USED.
SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT (PORT 4 RECOMMENDED) AND CONFIGURE FOR LOW RESOLUTION:
REFER TO THE MFD-640 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PORT SELECTIONS.
UNILINK CONFIGURATION
I/O CONFIG:
SELECT SERIAL AND CONFIGURE PORT AS LO-RES DISPLAY
MFD-640 CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU
GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION
CDU/MFD BAUD RATE
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON
RS-422 MENU
J1-58, J1-57 RX FUNC: UNILINK PRIMARY
RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1
SELECT 19.2 KBPS
SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 1
SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 2
SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 3
CONFIGURATION NOTES
1. CONFIGURE MFD-LR HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #1 CDU.
2. CONFIGURE MFD-LR HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #2 CDU.
3. CONFIGURE MFD-LR HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #3 CDU.
EXAMPLE 1
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, MFD-LR
EXAMPLE 2
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, FPCDU
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, MFD-LR
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
UNILINK NODE ID: 40
RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU
J1-47, J1-46 TX FUNC: UNILINK
J1-58, 47, J1-57,46 SPEED: 19200
ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WOULD EXCEED THE TOTAL OF FOUR DEVICES AND CREATE AN ERROR MESSAGE.
23-20-06
Page 335
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
U.
UL-801 to CVR/CVFDR
CVR-120A, CVR-120R,
CVFDR-145, CVFDR-145R
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
ARINC 429 TX
HS OUTPUT TO CVR/CVFDR
CAUTION:
48
SPEED STRAP
GND = HS
12
VALID
GND = VALID
10
18
DATALINK
ARINC 429
RX
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
PIN 48 (DATA LINK SPEED STRAP) SETS THE ARINC 429 RX PORT TO HIGH OR LOW SPEED. UNILINK TRANSMITS 429 HIGH SPEED AND THEREFORE MUST BE
GROUNDED AS SHOWN.
PIN 12 (VALID) DATA LINK VALID MUST BE GROUNDED AS SHOWN TO ENABLE DATA LINK RECORDING. IF THIS PIN IS GROUNDED WITH NO COMMUNICATION
FROM A DATA LINK, A CVR FAIL (AMBER LED) WILL BE PRESENT ON THE COCKPIT CONTROL UNIT (CCU).
CONNECT TO ANY AVALABLE ARINC TX PORT, CONFIGURE FOR HIGH SPEED, AND SET THE PORT TO CVR. RECEIVE PORTS ARE NOT REQUIRED AT THIS TIME.
23-20-06
Page 336
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
V.
UL-801 to DTU-100
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
ETHERNET TX
ETHERNET RX
TP
DTU-100
(P/N 1406-01-X)
P2
ETHERNET
RX CH 3
ETHERNET
TX CH 3
ETHERNET SHIELD
ETHERNET SHIELD
W.
ETHERNET CABLE PER ARINC 646 (10 BASE-T FOR AVIONICS USE). P/N ECS 392404 OR EQUIVALENT.
THREE ETHERNET PORTS ARE AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART IN THIS MANUAL.
THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THIS MANUAL.
UL-801 to SSDTU
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
ETHERNET
TX
ETHERNET
RX
TP
SSDTU
(P/N 1408-00-X)
ETHERNET SHIELD
13
SHIELD
ETHERNET
RX CH3
ETHERNET
TX CH3
NOTES:
USE ETHERNET CABLE ECS P/N 392404 OR THERMAX/CDT 956-426 OR EQUIVALENT.
THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE
LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG.
THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THE MANUAL.
THREE ETHERNET PORTS ARE AVAILABLE. WIRING AND CONFIGURATION ARE UP TO THE DISCRETION OF THE INSTALLER.
23-20-06
Page 337
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
X.
UL-801 to Portable DTU-100
UL-801
P/N 10801-XX
ETHERNET TX
BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR
P2
PORTABLE DTU-100
(P/N 1407-01-1)
ETHERNET
RX CH3
ETHERNET SHIELD
ETHERNET SHIELD
ETHERNET RX
CAUTION:
ETHERNET
TX CH3
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENTS A WIRING HARNESS THAT IS PART OF THE
PORTABLE DTU.
ETHERNET CABLE PER ARINC 626 (10 BASE-T AVIONICS USE) P/N ECS 392404 OR EQUIVALENT.
THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THIS MANUAL.
Y.
UL-801 to Portable SSDTU
NOTE:
It is strongly recommended that customer’s using a DTU-100 upgrade to the
SSDTU.
UL-801
P/N 10801-XX
ETHERNET TX
ETHERNET RX
ETHERNET SHIELD
CAUTION:
J2 BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR
HARNESS
(P/N 81140821)
PORTABLE SSDTU
(P/N 1409-00-2)
P2
13 13
13
ETHERNET
RX CH3
ETHERNET
TX CH1
SHIELD #3
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENTS A WIRING HARNESS THAT IS PART OF THE
PORTABLE SSDTU.
USE ETHERNET CABLE ECS P/N 392404 OR THERMAX/CDT P/N 956-426 OR EQUIVALENT.
THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG.
THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THIS MANUAL.
23-20-06
Page 338
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Z.
UL-801 Airborne-based Telephony SatCom Systems
(1)
UL-801 to Aero-M – without FANS
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
RS-232 #1
CAUTION:
MP
TT-3000 AERO-M
(P/N 403068A-UAT)
TP
TX
4A
14
TXD
RX
4C
13
RXD
GND
3A
16
GND
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
NOTES:
SIGNAL NAMES ARE IDENTIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND ARE NOT USED TO IMPLY SIGNAL DIRECTION.
(2)
UL-801 to ARINC 741 Satellite Communication (SatCom) Packet Data –
without FANS
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
TP
ARINC 429 RX
PORT #6 SATCOM
ARINC 429 TX
PORT #3 SATCOM
13A
TT-5000 AERO-I
(P/N 4050033A-UAT-XXX)
BP
42
13B
43
15A
44
15B
45
CMU #1 & #2
OUTPUT PORT
(ARINC 429)
CMU #2
INPUT PORT
(ARINC 429)
PRINTER
(IF APPLICABLE)
CAUTION:
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
23-20-06
Page 339
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(3)
UL-801 to AirCell and Iridium Systems
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
RS-232 #1
CAUTION:
AIRCELL (AGT.02)
IRIDIUM (ST3100)
AIRCELL/IRIDIUM (AST3500)
MP
TX
4A
TX
RX
4C
RX
GND
3A
GND
RS-232
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS
CORPORATION.
(4)
UL-801 Connection to AirCell Axxess ST4200/ST4020 – Channel #1
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
AIRCELL AXXESS
ST4200/ST4020 - CHANNEL #1
MP
RS-232 #1
CAUTION:
(5)
AA
RTS
CTS
TX
4A
RX
RX
4C
TX
GND
3A
GG
GND
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
UL-801 Connection to AirCell Axxess ST4200/ST4020 – Channel #2
AIRCELL AXXESS
ST4200/ST4020 - CHANNEL #2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
MP
RS-232 #1
CAUTION:
RS-232
CTS
RTS
TX
4A
DD
RX
RX
4C
TX
GND
3A
GND
RS-232
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
23-20-06
Page 340
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(6)
UL-801 Connections to International Communications Group (ICG)
ICS-220A
UL-801
P/N10801-00
ICS-220A
MP
ARINC 429 BUS
TP
RX A
D4
15A
RX B
D5
15B
SHIELD
D6
TX A
D1
13A
TX B
D2
13B
SHIELD
D3
TP
RS-232
CAUTION:
ARINC 429 TX #6
MP
TX
D5
4A
TX
RX
D6
4C
RX
D8
3A
GND
GND
ARINC 429 TX #3
RS-232 #1
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
THESE PIN NUMBERS ARE RECOMMENDED. HOWEVER, THE WIRING AND CONFIGURATION ARE UP TO THE DISCRETION OF THE INSTALLER.
AA. UL-801 to ARINC 740/744/744A Printer
PRINTER
ARINC 740 OR ARINC 744
UL801
(P/N 10801XX)
TP
ARINC 429 RECEIVE
PORT #4 PRINTER
ARINC 429 TRANSMIT
PORT #3 PRINTER
14A
14B
15A
15B
ARINC 429 TRANSMIT
ARINC 429 RECEIVE
SATCOM
IF APPLICABLE
CAUTION:
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
ALL WIRES AWG 22 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
SEE THE PRINTER MANUFACTURER FOR PIN IDENTIFICATIONS.
23-20-06
Page 341
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
BB. UL-801 to PC Printer
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
TP
GENERIC SERIAL
PRINTER
DB25
TX
8A
RECEIVE DATA
RX
8C
TRANSMIT DATA
GND
3A
SIGNAL GROUND
RS-232 #2
MP
CAUTION:
RTS
CTS
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
CC. UL-801 to Generic Parallel Printer
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
TX
8A
RX
8C
SERIAL/PARALLEL
CONVERTER
(B&B 232SPS2)
DB25
SERIAL
TP
TRANSMIT DATA
RECEIVE DATA
SIGNAL GROUND
DB25
PARALLEL
GENERIC
PARALLEL
PRINTER
RS-232 #2
MP
GND
CAUTION:
3A
SET THE DIP SWITCH ON THE 232SPS2 AS FOLLOWS (DEFAULT SETTING):
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF/ON
OFF
9600
baud
9600
baud
9600
baud
XON/
XOFF
8 Data
Bits
No
Parity
Dont
Care
Serial/
Parity
IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
23-20-06
Page 342
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
3.
UL-801 Connector Pin Identification
A.
Top Plug
NOTE:
Pin
Connector pin differences between the UL-701 and UL-801 top plug are shown in
the shaded areas below. These differences are being presented for use when
upgrading from UL-701 to UL-801.
UL-801 Function
UL-701 Function
1A
10/100BT Ethernet (+) TX #1
Same
1B
10/100BT Ethernet (-) TX #1
Same
1C
10/100BT Ethernet RX (+) #1
Same
1D
10/100BT Ethernet RX (-) #1
Same
2A
ARINC 429 RX (A) #14
Same
2B
ARINC 429 RX (B) #14
Same
2C
ARINC 429 RX (A) #13
Same
2D
ARINC 429 RX (B) #13
Same
3A
10/100BT Ethernet TX (+) #2 Essential
RS-422/RS-232 (A) TX #8
3B
10/100BT Ethernet TX (-) #2 Essential
RS-422 TX (B) #8
3C
10/100BT Ethernet RX (+) #2 Essential
RS-422/RS-232 (A) RX #8
3D
10/100BT Ethernet RX (-) #2 Essential
RS-422 RX (B) #8
4A
10/100BT Ethernet TX (+) #3 Essential
RS-422/RS-232 (A) TX #7
4B
10/100BT Ethernet TX (-) #3 Essential
RS-422 TX (B) #7
4C
10/100BT Ethernet RX (+) #3 Essential
RS-422/RS-232 (A) RX#7
4D
10/100BT Ethernet RX #3 (-) Essential
RS-422 RX (B) #7
5A
RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #6
Same
5B
RS-422 (B) TX #6
Same
5C
RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #6
Same
5D
RS-422 (B) RX #6
Same
6A
RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #5
Same
6B
RS-422 (B) TX #5
Same
6C
RS-422 (A) /RS-232 RX #5
Same
6D
RS-422 (B) RX #5
Same
7A
RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #4
Same
7B
RS-422 (B) TX #4
Same
7C
RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #4
Same
7D
RS-422 (B) RX #4
Same
8A
RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #2
Same
8B
RS-422 (B) TX #2
Same
8C
RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #2
Same
8D
RS-422 (B) RX #2
Same
9A
RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #3
Same
9B
RS-422 (B) TX #3
Same
23-20-06
Page 343
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Top Plug - continued
Pin
UL-801 Function
UL-701 Function
9C
RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #3
Same
9D
RS-422 (B) RX #3
Same
10A
RS-232 TX
Same
10B
RS-232 RX
Same
10C
RS-232 GND
Same
10D
Discrete Out #1
Same
11A
ARINC 429 (A) TX #4
Same
11B
ARINC 429 (B) TX #4
Same
11C
Config Mod Clock
Same
11D
Config Mod Power
Same
12A
ARINC 429 (A) RX #8
Same
12B
ARINC 429 (B) RX #8
Same
12C
Config Mod Data (I/O)
Same
12D
Config Mod GND
Same
13A
ARINC 429 (A) RX #6
Same
13B
ARINC 429 (B) RX #6
Same
13C
ARINC 429 (A) RX #7
Same
13D
ARINC 429 (B ) RX #7
Same
14A
ARINC 429 (A) RX #4
Same
14B
ARINC 429 (B) RX #4
Same
14C
ARINC 429 (A) RX #5
Same
14D
ARINC 429 (B) RX #5
Same
15A
ARINC 429 (A) TX #3
Same
15B
ARINC 429 (B) TX #3
Same
15C
ARINC 429 (A) RX #3
Same
15D
ARINC 429 (B) RX #3
Same
23-20-06
Page 344
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
B.
Middle Plug
NOTE:
Pin
Connector pin differences between the UL-701 and UL-801 middle plug are
shown in the shaded areas below. These differences are being presented for use
when upgrading from UL-701 to UL-801.
UL-801 Function
UL-701 Function
1A
ARINC 429 (A) TX #1
Same
1B
ARINC 429 (B) TX #1
Same
1C
ARINC 429 (A) RX #1
Same
1D
ARINC 429 (B) RX #1
Same
2A
ARINC 429 (A) TX #2
Same
2B
ARINC 429 (B) TX #2
Same
2C
ARINC 429 (A) RX #2
Same
2D
ARINC 429 (B) RX #2
Same
3A
RS-232 GND
Same
3B
ARINC 429 (A) RX #12
Same
3C
ARINC 429 (B) RX #12
Same
3D
ARINC 429 (A) RX #11
Same
4A
RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #1
Same
4B
RS-422 (B) TX #1
Same
4C
RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #1
Same
4D
RS-422 (B) RX #1
Same
5A
Discrete Out #14
Same
5B
ARINC 429 (A) TX #5
Discrete Out #15
5C
ARINC 429 (B) TX #5
Discrete Out #16
5D
ARINC 429 (B) RX #11
Same
6A
Discrete Out #10
Same
6B
Discrete Out #11
Same
6C
Discrete Out #12
Same
6D
Discrete Out #13
Same
7A
Discrete Out #6
Same
7B
Discrete Out #7
Same
7C
Discrete Out #8
Same
7D
Discrete Out #9
Same
8A
Discrete Out #2
Same
8B
Discrete Out #3
Same
8C
Discrete Out #4
Same
8D
Discrete Out #5
Same
9A
ARINC 429 (A) TX #6
Discrete In #13
9B
ARINC 429 (B) TX #6
Discrete In #14
9C
ARINC 429 (A) TX #7
Discrete In #15
23-20-06
Page 345
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Middle Plug - continued
Pin
C.
UL-801 Function
UL-701 Function
9D
ARINC 429 (B) TX #7
Discrete In #16
10A
Discrete In #9
Same
10B
Discrete In #10
Same
10C
ARINC 429 (A) RX #15
Discrete In #11
10D
ARINC 429 (B) RX #15
Discrete In #12
11A
Discrete In #5
Same
11B
Discrete In #6
Same
11C
Discrete In #7
Same
11D
Discrete In #8
Same
12A
Discrete In #2
Same
12B
Discrete In #3
Same
12C
Discrete In #4
Same
12D
ARINC 429 (A) RX #10
Same
13A
ARINC 429 (A) RX #16
Telephone Ring (Modem I/F)
13B
ARINC 429 (A) RX #9
Same
13C
ARINC 429 (B) RX #9
Same
13D
ARINC 429 (B) RX #10
Same
14A
ARINC 429 (B) RX #16
Telephone Tip (Modem I/F)
14B
Spare
PTT Radio
14C
Chassis GND
Gnd Rtn VHF-ACARS (VHF Radio)
14D
Discrete In #1
Same
15A
ARINC 429 (A) TX #8
VHF Modem TX (+)
15B
ARINC 429 (B) TX #8
VHF Modem TX (-)
15C
Spare
VHF Modem RX (+)
15D
Spare
VHF Modem RX (-)
Bottom Plug
Pin
UL-801 Function
UL-701 Function
Spare
Same
+28 VDC
Same
Chassis GND
Same
Power GND
Same
VHF Antenna
Same
23-20-06
Page 346
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
4.
UL-801 Connectors
A B C D
D C B A
10
10
10
15
15
A B C D
15
Top Plug
10
A B C D
15
D C B A
D C B A
10
10
10
15
15
A B C D
15
Middle Plug
10
15
D C B A
ARINC Key
Code #08
Bottom Plug
UL-801 Connector
Rack Connector
NOTE: The darkened portion of the keying above indicates the extended part of the key;
the light portion indicates the key hole.
23-20-06
Page 347
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
System Data Installation
1.
International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO)
Aircraft Type Designators
When installing system data during the configuration process, the ICAO aircraft type
designator is used. The following tables contain examples of commonly used ICAO
designators for various aircraft. Use ICAO Document 8643, found under “Publications” at
http://www.icao.int/, to ascertain the correct designator for your aircraft.
Manufacturer/Model
AIRBUS
A-300
A-310
ATR
ATR-42/72
BAC
111 One-eleven
BEECH
90, A90 to E90 King Air
200, 1300 Super King Air
300 Super King Air
B300 Super King Air 350
400 Beechjet
1900 (C-12J)
BELL
212, 412
214ST
222, 230, 430
BOEING
707
727 (C-22)
737-100/200 (CT-43)
737-300/400/500
747-100/200/300 (E-4, VC-25)
747SP
757
C135
BRITISH AEROSPACE
BAC 111 One-eleven
BAe-125-700/801 (C-29)
BAe-125-1000
BAe-146, RJ
BAe-4100 Jetstream 41
ICAO Designator
A300
A310
ATR
BA111
BE9L
BE20
BE30
B350
MU30
B190
B12
BSTP
B222
B708
B727
B73A
B73B
B74A
B74S
B757
C135
BA11
H25B
H25C
BA46
JSTB
23-20-06
Page 401
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Manufacturer/Model
CANADAIR
CL-600/601/604 Challenger
RJ Regional Jet
CESSNA
F406 Caravan 2
441 Conquest, Conquest 2
500, 501 Citation, Citation 1/1SP
525 Citation Jet
526 Citation Jet
550, S550, 551, 552 Citation
2/S2/2SP/Bravo
560 Citation 5
650 Citation 3/6/7
DASSAULT
Falcon 10, Mystere 10
Falcon 20, Mystere 20
Falcon 50, Mystere 20
Falcon 900, Mystere 900
Falcon 2000
DEHAVILLAND CANADA
DHC-6 Twin Otter
DHC-7 Dash 7
DHC-8 Dash 8
DOUGLAS
DC-8
DC-9
EMBRAER
EMB-110/111 Bandeirante
EMB-120 Brasilia
EMB-145
EMB-140
EUROCOPTER
AS-365/565 Dauphin
BK-117
FOKKER
50
GRUMMAN
G-159 Gulfstream 1
G-1159 Gulfstream 2
Albatross
GULFSTREAM AEROSPACE
Gulfstream 3/4/5
ICAO Designator
CL60
CARJ
F406
C441
C500
C525
C526
C550
C560
C650
FA10
FA20
FA50
F900
F2TH
DHC6
DHC7
DHC8
DC8
DC9
E110
E120
E145
E140
AS65
BK17
F50
G159
GULF
U16
GULF
23-20-06
Page 402
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Manufacturer/Model
HAWKER
HS-124-400/600
HS-125-700
IAI
1123 Westwind
1124 Westwind
1125 Astra
Galaxy
ILYUSHIN
IL96
LEARJET
31
35
45
55
60
LOCKHEED
C-130
L-1011 Tristar
McDONNELL DOUGLAS
DC-8
DC-9
DC-10
MD-81/82/83/87/88
MD-90
MITSUBISHI
MU-300 Diamond
PIPER
PA-42 Cheyenne 3/400
RAYTHEON
90 King Air
200 Super King Air (C-12)
300 Super King Air
B300 Super King Air 350
400 Beechjet
1900
Hawker 801
Hawker 1000
REIMS
F406 Caravan 2
SIKORSKY
S-70
S-76
ICAO Designator
H25A
H25B
WW23
WW24
ASTR
GLAX
IL96
LJ31
LJ35
LJ45
LJ55
LJ60
C130
L101
DC8
DC9
DC10
MD80
MD90
MU30
PA42
BE9L
BE20
BE30
B350
MU30
B190
H25B
H25C
F406
H60
S76
23-20-06
Page 403
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Manufacturer/Model
TUPOLEV
Tu-154
WESTLAND
Puma
ICAO Designator
T154
PUMA
23-20-06
Page 404
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
2.
Configuration Worksheets
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation recommends that the following worksheets be
completed in order to assist with configuring the UniLink Configuration Module. One set of
worksheets should be filled out and a copy given to the customer. Fill in the blanks and
check the appropriate boxes based on the wiring of the aircraft and its set of avionics
components. Further, these worksheets may be submitted along with other approval
paperwork. A copy of these worksheets should be filed along with the aircraft paper work for
future reference.
NOTE: • A customer database is installed in each UniLink.
• You are hereby authorized to reproduce these worksheets as well as the
configuration module programming procedures if desired.
• It is recommended that the current UniLink configuration be recorded prior
to updating to a new UniLink software version. UniLink may not maintain
previous configuration settings with a software upgrade.
The default value for each option in the worksheets is underlined. Pressing the RETURN
LSK returns you to the menu from which you started.
UniLink input consists of one of the three following character types. Where necessary, each
field on the worksheets designates which type to use.
Types of character input allowed
Alpha
Alpha characters are the 26 characters of the
alphabet.
Shown as “A” on the worksheets.
Numeric
Numeric characters consist of the numbers 0 to 9.
Shown as “N” on the worksheets.
Alphanumeric
Shown as “AN” on the worksheets.
Alphanumeric characters are a combination of
letters (including both upper and lower case) and
numbers. Alphanumeric input can also contain
punctuation marks, and mathematical and other
conventional symbols (such as @, &, and *).
23-20-06
Page 405
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
A.
Customer/Aircraft Information
Customer Name:
_________________________________________________
Customer Address:
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
B.
Aircraft Manufacturer:
_________________________________________________
Aircraft Model No.:
_________________________________________________
Aircraft Serial No.:
_________________________________________________
Configuration Date:
_________________________________________________
Technician:
_________________________________________________
System Configuration Menu (Sys Config 1/4)
NOTE: Configuration options may be used only once. Any option that has been selected is
removed from the option list.
1. I/O Config
a)
DISCRETE (DISC) IN
• Active state of BRAKE SET indicates the parking brake is locked.
• Active state of DOOR CLOSED indicates the configured door is closed.
• Active state of STRUT COMP (Strut Compressed) indicates the aircraft is onground (weight on wheels).
• The TEST option is provided for development and engineering purposes only.
DISC IN 1/4
DISC IN 1
Middle Plug 14D
NOT USED
DOOR 1 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE
BRAKE SET
DOOR 2 CLOSED
GROUND
STRUT COMP
DOOR 3 CLOSED
OPEN
TEST
DOOR 4 CLOSED
DISC IN 2
Middle Plug 12A
NOT USED
DOOR 1 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE
BRAKE SET
DOOR 2 CLOSED
GROUND
STRUT COMP
DOOR 3 CLOSED
OPEN
TEST
DOOR 4 CLOSED
NOT USED
BRAKE SET
STRUT COMP
TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED
DOOR 2 CLOSED
DOOR 3 CLOSED
DOOR 4 CLOSED
GROUND
OPEN
DISC IN 3
Middle Plug 12B
ACTIVE STATE
23-20-06
Page 406
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Press NEXT. DISC IN 2/4 displays.
DISC IN 4
Middle Plug 12C
NOT USED
BRAKE SET
STRUT COMP
TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED
DOOR 2 CLOSED
DOOR 3 CLOSED
DOOR 4 CLOSED
GROUND
OPEN
NOT USED
BRAKE SET
STRUT COMP
TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED
DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE
DISC IN 5
Middle Plug 11A
DISC IN 6
Middle Plug 11B
DOOR 2 CLOSED
DOOR 3 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE
GROUND
OPEN
NOT USED
DOOR 1 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE
BRAKE SET
DOOR 2 CLOSED
GROUND
STRUT COMP
DOOR 3 CLOSED
OPEN
TEST
DOOR 4 CLOSED
Press NEXT. DISC IN 3/4 displays.
DISC IN 7
Middle Plug 11C
NOT USED
BRAKE SET
STRUT COMP
TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED
DOOR 2 CLOSED
DOOR 3 CLOSED
DOOR 4 CLOSED
GROUND
OPEN
BRAKE SET
STRUT COMP
TEST
DOOR 2 CLOSED
GROUND
DOOR 3 CLOSED
OPEN
DOOR 4 CLOSED
BRAKE SET
STRUT COMP
TEST
DOOR 2 CLOSED
GROUND
DOOR 3 CLOSED
OPEN
DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE
DISC IN 8
Middle Plug 11D
NOT USED
DOOR 1 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE
DISC IN 9
Middle Plug 10A
NOT USED
DOOR 1 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE
Press NEXT. DISC IN 4/4 displays.
DISC IN 10
Middle Plug 10B
NOT USED
DOOR 1 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE
BRAKE SET
STRUT COMP
TEST
DOOR 2 CLOSED
GROUND
DOOR 3 CLOSED
OPEN
DOOR 4 CLOSED
23-20-06
Page 407
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
b)
DISCRETE (DISC) OUT
• FANS VISUAL
− Output – Active Open or Active Ground configurable.
− Use any available discrete output pin and configure accordingly.
− The FANS VISUAL output discrete activates the ATC annunciator and
alerts the crew that an ATC advisory is active and the UniLink pages should
be accessed to view further information.
• FANS AURAL
− Output – Active Open or Active Ground configurable. Duration is
configurable.
− Use any available discrete output pin and configure accordingly.
− The FANS AURAL output discrete activates the aural warning device and
alerts the crew that an aural message has been received.
• CPDLC CNECT (Connect)
− Output – Active Open or Active Ground configurable.
− Use any available discrete output pin and configure accordingly.
− The CPDLC CNECT output discrete activates an optional CPDLC CNECT
annunciator while the UniLink is connected to the Current Data Authority
(CDA).
− If the CDA connection is disrupted or lost, the optional CPDLC CNECT
annunciator deactivates.
• The New Message (NEW MSG) discretes are provided to drive visual
indications of new/unread uplinks. Active state indicates a new/unread uplink
exists.
• The CHIME discretes are provided to drive aural indications of new/unread
uplinks. Active state indicates a new/unread uplink exists.
• VHF/SAT/TEL NOCOMM discretes are provided to drive visual indications
media link states. Active state indicates a particular medium is in NOCOMM
(link not established).
DISC OUT 1/5
DISC OUT 1
Top Plug 10D
DISC OUT 2
Middle Plug 8A
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
GROUND
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
OPEN
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
GROUND
OPEN
23-20-06
Page 408
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
DISC OUT 1/5 (Continued)
DISC OUT 3 Middle
Plug 8B
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
GROUND
OPEN
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
Press NEXT. DISC OUT 2/5 displays.
DISC OUT 4 Middle
Plug 8C
DISC OUT 5 Middle
Plug 8D
DISC OUT 6 Middle
Plug 7A
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
ACTIVE STATE
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE
GROUND
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
OPEN
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
GROUND
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
OPEN
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
GROUND
OPEN
Press NEXT. DISC OUT 3/5 displays.
DISC OUT 7 Middle
Plug 7B
DISC OUT 8 Middle
Plug 7C
DISC OUT 9 Middle
Plug 7D
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
ACTIVE STATE
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
NOT USED
ACTIVE STATE
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE
GROUND
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
OPEN
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
VOX ANNUN
GROUND
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
NEW MSG 1
OPEN
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
GROUND
OPEN
23-20-06
NEW MSG 2
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
Page 409
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Press NEXT. DISC OUT 4/5 displays.
DISC OUT 10
Middle Plug 6A
DISC OUT 11
Middle Plug 6B
DISC OUT 12
Middle Plug 6C
DISC OUT 13
Middle Plug 6D
DISC OUT 14
Middle Plug 5A
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
GROUND
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
OPEN
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
GROUND
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
OPEN
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
ACTIVE STATE
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE
NOT USED
VHF NOCOMM
CHIME 1
CPDLC CNECT
GROUND
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
OPEN
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
GROUND
VOX ANNUN
SAT NOCOMM
CHIME 2
OPEN
NEW MSG 1
TEL NOCOMM
FANS VISUAL
NEW MSG 2
VDR VOX SEL
FANS AURAL
ACTIVE STATE
GROUND
OPEN
23-20-06
Page 410
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
c)
ARINC RECEIVE
• Only one device/interface may configured on each ARINC receive port at a
time.
• UniLink configures the receive port speed based on the device selected.
− The receive port speed for the following devices are configured for low
speed: MCDU, Printer, A741 SDU, A604 CMC, IOP.
− The receive port speed for the following devices are configured based on the
device definition contained within the CDB: A702 FMS, Generic 429
Device.
− UniLink automatically detects the transmission speed (high/low) of the
following devices and configures the receive port speed accordingly:
A743A GNSS (including A743 GPS), DADC (Digital ADC).
• UniLink processes data labels received from A702 FMS and Generic 429
Device based on the device definition contained within the CDB.
• Devices configured on a receive port must also be configured on a transmit port
except for the following receive-only devices: IOP, A743A GNSS (including
A743 GPS), DADC.
• The TEST option is provided for development and engineering purposes only.
ARINC RX 1/3
PORT 1
(A) Middle Plug 1C
(B) Middle Plug 1D
FMS/CDU1
FMS/CDU2
FMS/CDU3
Only FMS/CDU1 is may be chosen for this
MCDU1
MCDU2
MCDU3
port.
NOT USED
FMS/CDU1
FMS/CDU2
FMS/CDU3
PORT 2
(A) Middle Plug 2C
740 PRINT
741 SDU
VM CMC
604 CMC
(B) Middle Plug 2D
DHC8 IOP1
DHC8 IOP2
MCDU2
MCDU3
702 FMS1
702 FMS2
702 FMS3
743A GNSS
750 VDR
TEST
ADC1
ADC2
GENERIC1
GENERIC2
GENERIC3
GENERIC4
Generic1 - 4 identifies up to four optional, generic input devices which can be
included in a customer database.
NOT USED
FMS/CDU1
FMS/CDU2
FMS/CDU3
PORT 3
(A) Top Plug 15C
740 PRINT
741 SDU
VM CMC
604 CMC
(B) Top Plug 15D
DHC8 IOP1
DHC8 IOP2
MCDU2
MCDU3
702 FMS1
702 FMS2
702 FMS3
743A GNSS
750 VDR
TEST
ADC1
ADC2
GENERIC1
GENERIC2
GENERIC3
GENERIC4
NOT USED
FMS/CDU1
FMS/CDU2
FMS/CDU3
PORT 4
(A) Top Plug 14A
740 PRINT
741 SDU
VM CMC
604 CMC
(B) Top Plug 14B
DHC8 IOP1
DHC8 IOP2
MCDU2
MCDU3
702 FMS1
702 FMS2
702 FMS3
743A GNSS
750 VDR
TEST
ADC1
ADC2
GENERIC1
GENERIC2
GENERIC3
GENERIC4
23-20-06
Page 411
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
ARINC RX 1/3 (CONTINUED)
PORT 5
(A) Top Plug 14C
(B) Top Plug 14D
PORT 6
(A) Top Plug 13A
(B) Top Plug 13B
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
Press NEXT. ARINC RX 2/3 displays.
PORT 7
(A) Top Plug 13C
(B) Top Plug 13D
PORT 8
(A) Top Plug 12A
(B) Top Plug 12B
PORT 9
(A) Middle Plug 13B
(B) Middle Plug 13C
PORT 10
(A) Middle Plug 12D
(B) Middle Plug 13D
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
23-20-06
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
Page 412
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
ARINC RX 2/3 (Continued)
PORT 11
(A) Middle Plug 3D
(B) Middle Plug 5D
PORT 12
(A) Middle Plug 3B
(B) Middle Plug 3C
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
Press NEXT. ARINC RX 3/3 displays.
PORT 13
(A) Top Plug 2C
(B) Top Plug 2D
PORT 14
(A) Top Plug 2A
(B) Top Plug 2B
PORT 15
(A) Middle Plug 10C
(B) Middle Plug 10D
PORT 16
(A) Middle Plug 13A
(B) Middle Plug 14A
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
NOT USED
740 PRINT
DHC8 IOP1
702 FMS1
750 VDR
GENERIC1
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
DHC8 IOP2
702 FMS2
TEST
GENERIC2
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
FMS/CDU2
VM CMC
MCDU2
702 FMS3
ADC1
GENERIC3
23-20-06
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
FMS/CDU3
604 CMC
MCDU3
743A GNSS
ADC2
GENERIC4
Page 413
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
d)
ARINC TRANSMIT
NOTE: • If any ARINC TX port is selected as 741 SDU, then SAT must be
selected as the Normal or Alternate option in the PRIORITY (SYS
CONFIG 1/4) option page.
• If an ARINC TX choice is displayed in small print and there is no arrow
pointing to an LSK that selection is not available for use.
• VOX tune bus can only be configured for one port.
ARINC TX 1/3
PORT 1
(A) Middle Plug 1A
(B) Middle Plug 1B
NOTE:
Only TX port with a default.
PORT 1 SPEED
PORT 2
(A) Middle Plug 2A
(B) Middle Plug 2B
Ports 2-16 have no default settings.
PORT 2 SPEED
PORT 3
(A) Top Plug 15A
(B) Top Plug 15B
PORT 3 SPEED
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
MCDU1
702 FMS1
TEST NOTE:
LOW
NOTE:
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
MCDU1
702 FMS1
TEST
LOW
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
MCDU1
702 FMS1
TEST
LOW
FMS/CDU2
FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT
VOX TUNE
VM CMC
604 CMC
MCDU2
MCDU3
CVR
702 FMS2
702 FMS3
750 VDR
Test is used by the Engineering Development
only. DO NOT CONFIGURE.
LOW is the only configurable option.
FMS/CDU2
FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT
VOX TUNE
VM CMC
604 CMC
MCDU2
MCDU3
CVR
702 FMS2
702 FMS3
750 VDR
HIGH
FMS/CDU2
VOX TUNE
MCDU2
702 FMS2
FMS/CDU3
VM CMC
MCDU3
702 FMS3
740 PRINT
604 CMC
CVR
750 VDR
FMS/CDU2
VOX TUNE
MCDU2
702 FMS2
FMS/CDU3
VM CMC
MCDU3
702 FMS3
740 PRINT
604 CMC
CVR
750 VDR
HIGH
FMS/CDU2
VOX TUNE
MCDU2
702 FMS2
FMS/CDU3
VM CMC
MCDU3
702 FMS3
740 PRINT
604 CMC
CVR
750 VDR
HIGH
Press NEXT. ARINC TX 2/3 displays.
PORT 4
(A) Top Plug 11A
(B) Top Plug 11B
PORT 4 SPEED
PORT 5
(A) Middle Plug 5B
(B) Middle Plug 5C
PORT 5 SPEED
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
MCDU1
702 FMS1
TEST
LOW
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
MCDU1
702 FMS1
TEST
LOW
HIGH
23-20-06
Page 414
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
ARINC TX 2/3 (Continued)
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
MCDU1
702 FMS1
TEST
LOW
PORT 6
(A) Middle Plug 9A
(B) Middle Plug 9B
PORT 6 SPEED
FMS/CDU2
VOX TUNE
MCDU2
702 FMS2
FMS/CDU3
VM CMC
MCDU3
702 FMS3
740 PRINT
604 CMC
CVR
750 VDR
FMS/CDU2
VOX TUNE
MCDU2
702 FMS2
FMS/CDU3
VM CMC
MCDU3
702 FMS3
740 PRINT
604 CMC
CVR
750 VDR
HIGH
FMS/CDU2
VOX TUNE
MCDU2
702 FMS2
FMS/CDU3
VM CMC
MCDU3
702 FMS3
740 PRINT
604 CMC
CVR
750 VDR
HIGH
Press NEXT. ARINC TX 3/3 displays.
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
MCDU1
702 FMS1
TEST
LOW
FMS/CDU1
741 SDU
MCDU1
702 FMS1
TEST
LOW
PORT 7
(A) Middle Plug 9C
(B) Middle Plug 9D
PORT 7 SPEED
PORT 8
(A) Middle Plug 15A
(B) Middle Plug 15B
PORT 8 SPEED
e)
HIGH
SERIAL
SERIAL 1/2
PORT 1
TX:
(+) Middle Plug 4A
(−)Middle Plug 4B
RX:
(+)Middle Plug 4C
(−)Middle Plug 4D
PORT 2
TX:
(+) Top Plug 8A
(−) Top Plug 8B
RX:
(+) Top Plug 8C
(−) Top Plug 8D
PORT 3
TX:
(+) Top Plug 9A
(−) Top Plug 9B
RX:
(+) Top Plug 9C
(−) Top Plug 9D
NOT USED
VHF GND SIM
HI-RES DISPLAY 2
LO-RES DISPLAY
SAT GND SIM
TEL SIM
AERO-M
IRIDIUM
PRINTER
HI-RES DISPLAY 1
NOT USED
VHF GND SIM
HI-RES DISPLAY 2
LO-RES DISPLAY
SAT GND SIM
TEL SIM
AERO-M
IRIDIUM
PRINTER
HI-RES DISPLAY 1
NOT USED
VHF GND SIM
HI-RES DISPLAY 2
LO-RES DISPLAY
SAT GND SIM
TEL SIM
AERO-M
IRIDIUM
PRINTER
HI-RES DISPLAY 1
23-20-06
Page 415
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Press NEXT. SERIAL 2/2 displays.
PORT 4
TX:
(+) Top Plug 7A
(−) Top Plug 7B
RX:
(+) Top Plug 7C
(−) Top Plug 7D
PORT 5
TX:
(+) Top Plug 6A
(−) Top Plug 6B
RX:
(+) Top Plug 6C
(−) Top Plug 6D
PORT 6
TX:
(+) Top Plug 5A
(−) Top Plug 5B
RX:
(+) Top Plug 5C
(−) Top Plug 5D
NOT USED
VHF GND SIM
HI-RES DISPLAY 2
LO-RES DISPLAY
SAT GND SIM
TEL SIM
AERO-M
IRIDIUM
PRINTER
HI-RES DISPLAY 1
NOT USED
VHF GND SIM
HI-RES DISPLAY 2
LO-RES DISPLAY
SAT GND SIM
TEL SIM
AERO-M
IRIDIUM
PRINTER
HI-RES DISPLAY 1
NOT USED
VHF GND SIM
HI-RES DISPLAY 2
LO-RES DISPLAY
SAT GND SIM
TEL SIM
AERO-M
IRIDIUM
PRINTER
HI-RES DISPLAY 1
23-20-06
Page 416
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
f)
GRAPHICS
•
Low Resolution Display Devices
These devices include all CDUs, MCDUs, RCDUs, MFD-640 (with MFD SCN
1011.4.7 or earlier). A maximum total of four display devices may be used
within any of the three CDU graphics ports. For example:
EXAMPLE 1
CDU 1 GR APHICS DISP ON
CDU , RC DU
EXAMPLE 2
C DU1 GRAPH IC S D ISP ON
C DU, FPC DU
CDU 2 GR APHICS DISP ON
CDU
CD U2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CD U, MFD-LR
CDU 3 GR APHICS DISP ON
CDU
CD U3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
ANY AD DITIONAL SELECTION S WILL RESULT IN AN ERR OR MESSAGE.
•
High Resolution Display Devices
These devices include all EFI-890Rs and MFD-640 (with MFD SCN 1011.4.8
or later). Additionally, a maximum total of two high resolution display devices
may be included within any of the three CDU graphics ports. For example:
EXAMPLE 1
CDU 1 GR APHICS DISP ON
CDU , RC DU, HR1
EXAMPLE 2
C DU1 GRAPH IC S D ISP ON
C DU, FPC DU, HR1
CDU 2 GR APHICS DISP ON
CDU , HR 2
CD U2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CD U, H R2
CDU 3 GR APHICS DISP ON
CDU
CD U3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
ANY AD DITIONAL SELECTION S WILL RESULT IN AN ERR OR MESSAGE.
•
CDU Graphics
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
Each display device selected here will display only what is displayed on CDU1.
Additionally, each HR display device selected here will display the same
graphic but in a high resolution format.
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
Each display device selected here will display only what is displayed on CDU2.
Additionally, each HR display device selected here will display the same
graphic but in a high resolution format.
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
Each display device selected here will display only what is displayed on CDU3.
Additionally, each HR display device selected here will display the same
graphic but in a high resolution format.
23-20-06
Page 417
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Graphics Setup
CDU/MFD BAUD RATE
9600 BPS
19.2 KBPS
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
There are no defaults. CDU option(s) do not need to be
selected if weather graphics are not used.
CDU
RCDU
MFD-LR
HR1
RCDU
MFD-LR
HR1
RCDU
MFD-LR
HR1
HR2
LR = Low Resolution; HR = High Resolution
RCDU = Remote CDU
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
HR2
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
HR2
23-20-06
Page 418
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
2.
VHF CONFIG
VHF CONFIG 1/2
RADIO TYPE
NONE
CONTACT TIMER
ENABLED
INTERNAL VDR
Internal VDR must be
selected if VHF is
configured to other than
NONE.
ARINC 750 VDR
DISABLED
The contact timer verifies that the current VHF frequency is still usable when the channel has not had any uplink
traffic received for a period of time. Enabling this option provides better media management performance.
TRACKER TIMER
ENABLED
DISABLED
The tracker timer provides flight following information to the DSP. This setting is enabled by default to provide
better ACARS link management performance.
PREFERRED DSP
NOTE:
NONE
ARINC
SITA
AVICOM
Although the Preferred DSP is selected with this option, the ARINC, SITA, and AVICOM options may
also be enabled/disabled using the listed options. For further coverage information, contact your DSP.
ARINC
ENABLED
DISABLED
SITA
ENABLED
DISABLED
AVICOM
ENABLED
DISABLED
Press NEXT. VHF CONFIG 2/2 displays.
ENABLED MODE(S)
POA/AOA
MINIMUM SQP
(Minimum VHF Signal
Quality)
Range is 3 – 15; 4
SQP THRESHOLD
Range is 3 – 15; 12
VOICE FREQ CONTROL
ENABLED 25KHZ
AOA ONLY
ENABLED 8.33/25KHZ
POA ONLY
DISABLED
VOICE FREQ CONTROL must
be set to DISABLED for the
UniLink 801.
23-20-06
Page 419
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
3.
SAT CONFIG
SAT CONFIG
ENABLED
TRACKER TIMER
DISABLED
The tracker timer provides flight following information to the service provider once every four hours during SatCom
medium inactivity. This setting should be enabled to provide better ACARS link management performance.
This timer is applicable when UniLink is configured with an A741 SDU. If Iridium is configured as an AIRPHONE,
the tracker timer is not active.
ENABLED
AUTO RETURN
DISABLED
If enabled, the UniLink attempts to re-establish the SatCom link every 10 minutes when in Satellite NOCOMM.
4.
PRIORITY
NOTE: •
•
If Aero-I SAT (ARINC 741) Packet Data Service is utilized, one of the
Normal/Alternate options must be set to SAT.
Alternate Comm Priority, which is used for Position Reporting only,
overrides Normal Comm Priority.
COMM PRIORITY
NORMAL (Priority ranking scheme for up to three downlink communications links.)
1ST
NONE
VHF
SAT
TEL
2ND
NONE
VHF
SAT
TEL
3RD
NONE
VHF
SAT
TEL
ALTERNATE (Used for Position Reporting only.)
1ST
NONE
VHF
SAT
TEL
2ND
NONE
VHF
SAT
TEL
3RD
NONE
VHF
SAT
TEL
NOTES:
•
Alternate priority is only applied to automatic position reports in the UASC Corporate Customer
Database.
•
Customers are able to limit Auto Position reports to only use the VHF media, SAT media, TEL
media or any two media. Likewise, users can choose to send Auto Position reports via all three
media options.
23-20-06
Page 420
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
5.
TEL CONFIG
TEL CONFIG 1/2
AIR PHONE
Used for dial up
modem calls only
and uses an RS-232
serial port configured
for IRIDIUM or
AERO-M. It is
primarily used for
obtaining color
weather maps but
may also provide
VHF backup.
NONE
T-T AERO-M
When interfacing with Aero-M, configure the
Aero-M Data Port (via the Full Feature
Handset only, P/N 405621A) for 9600 baud,
Flow Control XON/XOFF, “+++”- Mode
Enable, Results Code Enabled and ARQ
Mode Enabled. Refer to the TT-3000 Aero-M
Installation Manual.
IRIDIUM
Baud rate selection applies to Iridium
only. Select baud rate supported by
the software version as follows:
•
Confirm the UniLink baud rate
compatibility with the vendor and
the selected DSP.
•
Baud rate must be one of the
following:
2400 BPS
4800 BPS
•
ACCESS NUMBER
The number dialed
by the selected AIR
PHONE. Used to
connect with the
selected Datalink
Service Provider’s
MODEM bank.
WX MAPS
(Weather Maps)
If DISABLED is
selected, it is
required that NONE
is selected in the AIR
PHONE section.
9600 BPS
Contact the air phone
manufacturer for baud rate
compatibility with UniLink.
_________________________________ (Max 19 AN characters, 0-9, P,L, A)
The default value is to leave this field blank. Contact Universal Weather and Aviation
to obtain the Access Number.
Contact your DSP for the access number shown on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
A “P” may be entered to insert a pause, an “L” may be entered to insert “#”, or an “A”
may be entered to insert “*” as required by the telephony network.
Subscription service for UniLink may be obtained through Universal Weather and
Aviation, Inc. at 1-801-231-5600.
ENABLED
DISABLED
23-20-06
Page 421
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
TEL CONFIG 1/2
SUSP MSG
(Suspend Message)
Enables or disables
the invocation of the
TEL SUSPEND
message following a
TEL SUSPEND
event.
ENABLED
DISABLED
Press NEXT. TEL CONFIG 2/2 displays.
REDIAL PAUSE
_____ Seconds (5-60 seconds; 30SEC)
Redial Pause specifies the wait between
telephony redial attempts from 5 to 60
seconds.
DIAL ATTEMPTS
_____ Attempts (1-6 attempts; 6)
Dial Attempts specifies the total number of
dial attempts in a set from 1 to 6.
AUTO-DELAY
_____ Minutes (1-9 minutes; 5MIN)
Auto-Delay specifies the time between
sets of redial attempts from 1 to 9 minutes.
23-20-06
Page 422
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
6.
POS REPORT
These settings control the transmission of present position information while the aircraft is
on the ground or in the air. These transmissions are sent to the DSP and may be used to
provide flight following for aircraft tracking purposes. Transmission reporting time intervals
(INTV) may also be configured.
The POS REPORT message is periodic and defaults to every 15 minutes. If the aircraft is
configured for VHF, then SAT in the normal priority over the ocean SAT would be used for
the position report downlinks which could potentially be costly. In this case the alternate
priority would have only VHF which would prevent the downlink of automatic POS
REPORT messages when VHF was in NO COMM (i.e. it wouldn't switch to trying SAT).
POS REPORT
AUTOMATIC REPORTING:
IN AIR
ENABLED
DISABLED
ON GROUND
ENABLED
DISABLED
IN AIR DEFAULT
When ENABLED is selected, the
transmission of in air position
reporting is always turned on by
default.
When DISABLED is selected, the
transmission of in air position
reporting is always turned off by
default. Automatic Position
Reporting can be enabled or
disabled by the air crew during
flight if necessary.
ENABLED
DISABLED
AIR INTV
(Air Interval)
Air intervals can be modified
during flight but always return to
the values stored in the
configuration at power up.
_________ MINS (Max 2 N characters); 15MIN (1 – 99 is acceptable)
GROUND INTV
(Ground Interval)
_________ MINS (Max 2 N characters); 60MIN (1 – 99 is acceptable)
Press NEXT. The SYS CONFIG 2/4 page displays.
23-20-06
Page 423
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
C.
SYS CONFIG 2/4
SYS CONFIG 2/4
MEDIA ADVIS
(Media Advisory)
ENABLED
DISABLED
MET DATA
(Meteorological Data)
ENABLED
DISABLED
By enabling Met Data for Corporate and American Eagle versions, meteorological data messages are reported to
the ground once a Met data message uplink is received from the ground.
By enabling Met Data for the Air Nova version, meteorological data messages are reported upon enabling. An
uplink is not required.
FLIGHT NO.
ENABLED
DISABLED
Enabling the Flight Number allows the entry and display of flight number data on the UniLink Main Menu. The
INIT advisory logic will be active when Flight Number is enabled. INIT advisory logic will prompt the user to enter
Flight No data on the MAIN menu page.
OOOI DATA
(Out, Off, On, In)
Enabling OOOI is
recommended if
ARINC is selected as
the preferred DSP.
AIRCRAFT
The default value for
any of the AIRCRAFT
options is to leave the
field blank.
ICAO Aircraft Type,
Aircraft Registration
and Airline ID are
required information.
ENABLED
DISABLED
TYPE (ICAO Designator)
__ __ __ __
REGISTRATION
__ __ __ __ __ __ __
(Max 4 AN characters)
(Max 7 AN characters)
Valid Aircraft Registration may contain alpha characters upper case A through Z, numeric
characters 0 through 9, a dash/hyphen character (which may not be the first or last
character) and from 1 to 7 characters.
__ __ / __ __ __
(Max 2 AN characters/3 AN characters)
AIRLINE ID
FIN NUMBER
(Fleet Identifier Number)
(Max 3 AN characters)
__ __ __
ICAO ADDR
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Obtain the specific ICAO address from your DSP. This information is derived from the
registration number of the aircraft.
CLEARANCES
These settings
determine Air Traffic
Services (ATS)
functional options as
elected by the
customer.
OCEANIC
ENABLED
DISABLED
PUSHBACK
ENABLED
DISABLED
DEPARTURE
ENABLED
DISABLED
EXP TAXI
(Expected Taxi)
ENABLED
DISABLED
23-20-06
Page 424
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
SYS CONFIG 2/4 (Continued)
ALERTS
NEW MSG DISC DURATION
(New Message Discrete Duration)
ALERT1
__________________
ALERT2
__________________
CHIME1
__________________
CHIME2
INHIB ON GND
(Inhibit on Ground)
INHIB ALT
(Inhibit Altitude)
ALT TYPE
(Altitude Type)
__________________
__________________
__________________
RADIO
RADIO type may only be
configured when IOP bus
input is used. When
RADIO is configured,
INHIB ALT must be 2500
feet or below.
AFTER OFF
Alerts are turned off during __________________
this configured time
duration. 0MIN disables
this timer, which allows
the alerts to occur only
above the configured
INHIB ALT value.
MS (Max 4 N characters)
(Milliseconds); 100MS
MS (Max 4 N characters)
(Milliseconds); 100MS
MS (Max 4 N characters)
(Milliseconds); 100MS
MS (Max 4 N characters)
(Milliseconds); 100MS
KTS (Max 3 N characters)
(Knots); 50KTS
FT
(Max 5 N characters)
(Feet); 10,000FT
BARO
MIN (Max 2 N characters)
(Minutes); 5MIN
The timer is off if set to 0MIN.
Press NEXT. The SYS CONFIG 3/4 page displays.
23-20-06
Page 425
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
D.
SYS CONFIG 3/4
FANS requirements consist of the following:
• The FMS must use SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later.
• UniLink must be connected to the UNS bus from the FMS (not A429 HS bus).
• If FANS is enabled, the FMS must be configured with FANS enabled.
• If FANS is disabled, the FMS must be configured with FANS disabled.
SYS CONFIG 3/4
FANS
If FANS is enabled, the FMS must be
configured for it and must be at SCN
1000.5/1100.5 or later.
ENABLED
DISABLED
Special operational approval and crew
training is required to use FANS.
FANS AURAL
Works in conjunction with the FANS
AURAL output discrete and controls the
duration of the FANS AURAL alert.
The default value is set to 0MS, which
means that the Alerting device will
remain active until the message that
activated the alert has been viewed.
Therefore, it is recommended to set this
time duration to some other value than
0MS. A value such as 5000MS
(5 seconds) may be suitable in most
cases.
It is recommended to set this time
duration to a specific value required to
support correct operation of the aural
alerting device, for example a
SONALERT or Aural Warning
Generating equipment.
A value of zero is not recommended as it
can result in the loss of aural alerts from
a new message received if an unread
CPDLC message already exists. A value
such as 5000MS (5 seconds) may be
______________
suitable in most cases
DELAY MSG TX
(Delay Message Transmission)
______________
MS
(Max 4 N characters)
(Milliseconds); 0MS
MIN (Max 2 N characters)
(Minutes); 0MIN
Provides VHF message transmission delays, in minutes, in order to ensure a reliable Line of Sight
(LOS) connection after takeoff. Messages designated for delay (within the customer database) will be
suppressed during VHF/SAT NOCOMM until the timer expires, at which time the message is routed for
delivery over Telephony.
23-20-06
Page 426
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
SYS CONFIG 3/4 (Continued)
GROUND DELAY
______________
MIN (Max 2 N characters)
(Minutes); 0MIN
A Delay Advisory displays if a delay time other than zero is entered and the Delay Advisory time has
elapsed since the occurrence of the OOOI Out event.
FANS LATENCY
ATC may instruct the crew to utilize a
specific value. It’s recommended that the
value be configured for 0 (zero).
0 = latency is turned off.
______________
SEC (Max 3 N characters)
(Seconds); 0SEC
Range = 0 - 999
SUPP ADDR
(Supplemental Address)
______________
(Max 7 AN characters); the default value
is to leave the field blank.
Obtain a specific SUPP ADDRESS from your DSP.
Press NEXT. The SYS CONFIG 4/4 page displays. This page displays the log of the recent
Config Module Updates, which is organized by Date and Time columns.
23-20-06
Page 427
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
3.
Configuration Procedures
The Flight Management System (FMS) must be configured to use the UniLink
Communications Unit before you configure the UniLink system. Refer to the WAAS/SBAS
FMS Configuration Manual, report number 34-61-01, for FMS configuration procedures.
NOTE: •
•
The UASC FMS ARINC receiver port that receives data from the UniLink
must be configured for UniLink. Only one receiver port on each FMS may be
configured for a datalink device. UniLink and AFIS are mutually exclusive.
Only one may be configured.
The FMS transmitter port that supplies data to the UniLink must be
configured for UNS HS429-1. UNS HS429-1 is mandatory for FANS-capable
installations.
The screens throughout these procedures depict a FANS-enabled UniLink. Some screens will
appear differently without FANS.
A.
Starting the FMS
In order to access the UniLink menu, press the ON/OFF/DIM key on the faceplate of the
FMS to turn it on. The FMS displays the following:
1. FMS self-test page.
UNS - 1
------------------------CPU
PASS
RAM
PASS
DATABASE BANK # 100%
CONFIG MODULE
AUXILIARY
WAAS/ARINC
NOTE:
The DATABASE BANK field displays the number of the bank being tested
and the percentage complete. When successfully finished, the numbers change
to the word PASS and the FMS proceeds to the CONFIG MODULE test. All
tests display as PASS if the self-test completes correctly.
2. FMS copyright page.
COPYRIGHT 2010
UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
23-20-06
Page 428
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
3. INIT 1/1 menu.
POS
INIT 1/1
Â
date
23-AUG-11
utc
14:49:45
initial pos
id
-----N
40 51.01
W 074 03.65
nav database expires
26-AUG-11
¬ACCEPT fmc ver
1000.5
a. LSK [1L] field is highlighted. Enter the local airport identifier.
b. Press ENTER.
4. Local Airport Identifier window.
POS
KTUS
1/
tucson intl
NAV
32 06.97
ARPT W 110 56.46
elev
2643
mag var E 12.0
¬ACCEPT
a. Press the ACCEPT LSK [5L].
b. The INIT 1/1 menu displays.
c. Press the ACCEPT LSK [5L].
d. Press the DATA key.
5. DATA 1/4 menu.
DATA 1/4
¬NAV DATA
¬PILOT DATA
UNILINK®
¬DISK
MAINT®
a. Press the UNILINK LSK [3R].
23-20-06
Page 429
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
6. UNILINK menu.
FANS-Enabled
•
FANS-Disabled
If FANS is enabled, the top menu line •
displays UNILINK MENU. After the
UniLink is configured, a different set of
configuration options may be displayed
than in the FANS-Disabled menu.
•
If FANS is disabled, the top menu line
displays UNILINK MENU 1/2. Press the
NEXT key to access UNILINK MENU
2/2.
Additional options may appear at LSK
[1L], LSK [3L], LSK [2R], and LSK
[3R] depending which choices were
made during configuration.
UNILINK MENU
¬FLIGHT INFO
UNILINK
OPS®
MENU
1/2
TEXT
¬ATC
WX®
¬FREE-TEXT
¬COMM STATUS
¬MAINTENANCE
¬NOCOMM
flight no.
---¡¢z
RETURN®
¬COMM
FANS-Enabled
STATUS
MSG
LOGS®
¡¢z
RETURN®
FANS-Disabled
NOTE: The NOCOMM option may display at LSK [5R] for either a FANS-enabled or
FANS-disabled UniLink. This option also displays as SAT NOCOMM,
TEL NOCOMM, or VHF NOCOMM, depending on which communications link
UniLink has lost.
7. UNILINK 2/2 menu for FANS-Disabled.
UNILINK MENU 2/2
¬DELAY
¬DIVERSION
¬ETA UPDATE
¬MAINTENANCE
SITUATION®
POS REPORT®
¡¢z
RETURN®
FANS-Disabled
8. Press the MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] on either the FANS-enabled or FANS-disabled
menu.
23-20-06
Page 430
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Use the completed worksheets, found in the Configuration Worksheets section, and enter that
information into UniLink. Work through all the UniLink menus and make any necessary
modifications for the configuration.
The steps should be performed in the order indicated by the large number in the corner of the
text box.
Some of the items configured are limited to a small number of options that are selectable by
pressing a line select key (LSK). The options appear one at a time in a set sequence and are
included in the text of the step.
Other items that may be configured are limited to more than a few options. These items are
selected by typing the number of the option as presented in a numbered list.
For those items that have many possible configurations, make an entry in a fill-in field. For
example, the ICAO has assigned hundreds of aircraft type designators. These type
designators consist of not more than four characters. On the Aircraft Configuration page the
aircraft type field allows entry of up to four characters.
If an entry field is not highlighted, press the corresponding line select key to move the cursor
highlight to the field.
B.
FANS Block Data Transmission
FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later is capable of transmitting FANS-specific data to support
the UniLink FANS functions. In order to enable the transmission of the FMS FANS-specific
data, ensure the FMS is configured to transmit over the UNS HS429-1 Bus.
1. Press the DATA key to display the DATA 1/4 page.
2. Press the PREV key to display the DATA 4/4 page.
3. Press DATE to highlight the date.
4. Enter 456789 and then press the ENTER key. The date will revert to the actual initialized
date.
5. Press the NEXT key to display the DATA 1/4 page.
6. Press MAINT to display the MAINT 1/1 page.
7. Press CONFIG to display the CONFIG 1/2 page. The EDIT prompt at LSK [1R] is not
normally displayed, but is displayed now because the configuration has been unlocked by
entering the code on the DATA 4/4 page.
8. Press EDIT to replace EDIT with STORE and allow FMS configuration settings to be
changed.
9. Press FMS CONFIG. Access the FMS CONFIG 2/4 page.
10. Press CMU. Enable FANS block data transmission.
11. Press STORE twice to restart the FMS.
23-20-06
Page 431
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
C.
Storing UniLink Options
When all new or modified UniLink options have been entered, the installer can review the
configuration by pressing the REVIEW LSK [4R] on the UniLink SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
This provides easy access to review and confirm any configuration warning from the
UniLink.
If all modifications are acceptable, press the STORE LSK [1R]. Wait a few seconds and
press the STORE LSK again. This stores the entered information, and verifies that required
dependencies and consistency exist between the Configuration Data and the software, and
also among the Configuration Data items. UniLink will initialize and the FMS will display
the following message:
UNILINK/FMS
COMM ERROR
RESELECT UNILINK
¬UNILINK
UNILINK, LSK [5L], displays in small capitals. Once the UniLink has rebooted and is ready
to process additional information, the word UNILINK redisplays in large capital letters.
Pressing the UNILINK LSK [5L] returns the FMS to the UNILINK MENU.
23-20-06
Page 432
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
D.
Configuration Edit Mode
The Configuration Worksheets, found in the Configuration Worksheet section, should have
been completed. These worksheets contain the options needed to configure UniLink. Have
these worksheets available when implementing the following procedures.
(1)
Selecting the UniLink Display Page
1 On
the FMS, press [DATA]
to display the DATA 1/4 page.
DATA 1/4
¬NAV DATA
2 Press
¬PILOT DATA
UNILINK [3R]
to display the UNILINK
MENU page.
UNILINK®
¬DISK
MAINT®
UNILINK MENU
¬FLIGHT INFO
OPS®
¬ATC
3 Press MAINTENANCE [4L]
to display the
MAINTENANCE 1/3 page.
MAINTENANCE 1/3
¬DEVICE STATUS
¬SENSOR STATUS
CONFIG®
¬VERSIONS
¬ERROR LOG
¬UNILINK MENU
TESTS®
¬COMM STATUS
¬MAINTENANCE
¬NOCOMM
flight no.
---¡¢z
RETURN®
4 Press CONFIG [1R] to
display the SYS CONFIG
1/4 page.
POWER LOG®
--:--z
RETURN®
23-20-06
Page 433
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Edit/Store Mode
1 Push LSK [1R] to highlight
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG
-----®
¬VHF CONFIG
TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG
POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY
the data entry field. Type in
the password 456789 and push
ENTER. The password will be
replaced with the word EDIT
and EDIT mode is enabled.
¬UNILINK MENU
REVIEW®
--:--z
RETURN®
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG
¬VHF CONFIG
EDIT®
¬SAT CONFIG
TELEPHONE®
¬PRIORITY
POS REPORT®
¬UNILINK MENU
REVIEW®
--:--z
RETURN®
2 Push EDIT [1R]. The word EDIT is
replaced with the word STORE. Do not
push STORE [1R] again until the
configuration is complete.
NOTE: Even though the LSK displays
STORE, EDIT mode is active.
NOTE: The FMS must be in an On
Ground condition while you
configure the UniLink. The data
entry field at [1R] will not be
accessible if the UniLink detects
a Weight Off Wheels condition.
23-20-06
Page 434
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
E.
Aircraft Configuration
1 Press the NEXT key on the
FMS to display the SYS
CONFIG 2/4 page.
SYS CONFIG 2/4
media advis
enabled
STORE®
met data
disabled
AIRCRAFT®
flight no.
disabled
CLEARANCES®
oooi data
disabled
ALERTS®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
2 Press LSK [1L] thru [4L]
and select the ENABLED
or DISABLED option for
each item.
4 the
Press [1L] to highlight
TYPE data entry
field. Enter the Type
and press ENTER.
5 [2L],
Repeat Step 4 on LSKs
[3L], and [4L]
respectively for
REGISTRATION, AIRLINE ID,
and FIN NUMBER. Press
[2R] to highlight the
ICAO ADDR field. Enter
the ICAO ADDR and press
ENTER.
3 Press AIRCRAFT [2R]
to display the
AIRCRAFT page.
AIRCRAFT
type
---STORE®
registration
icao addr
-------------º
airline id
--/--fin number
----:--z
6 toPresstheRETURN
[5R] to return
SYSTEM CONFIG 2/4
page.
23-20-06
Page 435
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
F.
Clearances
SYS CONFIG 2/4
media advis
enabled
STORE®
met data
disabled
AIRCRAFT®
flight no
disabled
CLEARANCES®
oooi data
disabled
ALERTS®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
1 Press
CLEARANCES [3R]
to display the
CLEARANCES page.
2 Press
LSK [2L] and
select the ENABLED
or
DISABLED option for
each item. Repeat for
LSK [3L].
CLEARANCES
STORE®
departure
disabled
exp taxi
disabled
oceanic
disabled
pushback
disabled
¬UNILINK
MENU
--:--z
RETURN®
3 Press
LSK [2R] and
select the ENABLED
or DISABLED option
for each item.
Repeat for LSK [3R].
4 Press
RETURN [5R] to return
to the SYS CONFIG 2/4 page.
23-20-06
Page 436
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
G.
Alerts
SYS CONFIG 2/4
media advis
enabled
STORE®
met data
disabled
AIRCRAFT®
flight no
disabled
CLEARANCES®
oooi times
disabled
ALERTS®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
Push LSK [2L] to highlight
the data entry field.
Enter a value for ALERT1.
Push ENTER to move the
cursor to the ALERT2 field.
Continuing to push the ENTER
key moves the cursor to the
CHIME1, CHIME2, INHIB ON GND,
INHIB ALT, and AFTER OFF
fields. Values may be entered
in these fields or left as the
default if no value is
entered.
Push ALERTS [4R] to
display the ALERTS page.
A value for ALT TYPE can
only be entered by pushing
LSK [4R] and then entering
a value.
ALERTS
new msg disc
duration:
STORE®
alert¡ alert
inhib alt
¡ººms
¡ººms
{¡ººººft
chime¡ chime
alt type
¡ººms
¡ººms
baro
inhib on gnd
after off
}ºkts
min
--:--z
RETURN®
Push RETURN [5R] to return
to the SYS CONFIG 2/4 page.
23-20-06
Page 437
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
H.
System Configuration 3/4
1 Push
NEXT on the FMS
keypad to display the
SYS CONFIG 3/4 page.
SYS CONFIG 3/4
fans
enabled
STORE®
fans aural
fans latency
ºms
ºsec
delay msg tx
supp addr
ºmin
------ground delay
ºmin
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
2 Push
LSK [1L] to toggle
enabled/disabled in the FANS field.
Push ENTER to move the cursor to
the FANS AURAL field. Push LSK [2L]
and enter a value. Continuing to
push the ENTER key moves the cursor
to the DELAY MSG TX, GROUND DELAY,
FANS LATENCY, and SUPP ADDR fields.
Values may be entered in these
fields or left as the default if
no value is entered.
NOTE: Pushing ENTER cycles through
all fields except the FANS field.
LSK [1L] must be pushed in order
to enter a value in the FANS field.
3 Push
NEXT twice to return to
the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
23-20-06
Page 438
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
I.
I/O Configuration
1 Press
I/O CONFIG [1L] to
display the I/O CONFIG page.
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG
STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG
TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG
POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY
¬UNILINK MENU
REVIEW®
--:--z
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN
¬DISCRETE OUT
SERIAL®
GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
¬UNILINK MENU
23-20-06
º§z
RETURN®
Page 439
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(1)
Discrete In
1 Press DISCRETE IN [1L] to
display the DISC IN 1/4
page.
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN
SERIAL®
¬DISCRETE OUT
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
¬UNILINK MENU
2 Press
LSK [2L] to configure
DISC IN 1. The DISC IN OPT 1/2
page displays with a list
of all available options.
DISC
disc in ¡
not used
disc in
not used
disc in £
not used
¬UNILINK
DISC IN OPT 1/2
select
¡ not used
# brake set
£ strut comp
¢ test
door ¡ closed
§ door closed
¶ door £ closed
º§z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
GRAPHICS®
IN
º§z
RETURN®
1/4
STORE®
active state
ground
active state
ground
active state
ground
º§z
MENU
RETURN®
3 Enter
the number of the
desired option and press
ENTER. The DISC IN 1/4
page displays.
4 Press
LSK [2R] and toggle the active
state of the DISC IN 1 between
GROUND and OPEN.
NOTE: Press the NEXT or PREV key to
toggle between DISC IN OPT pages 1
and 2.
5 Press
NEXT to display the next DISC IN
page and repeat steps 2, 3 and 4
until all 10 discrete inputs are set.
Press RETURN [5R].
23-20-06
Page 440
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(2)
Discrete Out
1 Press DISCRETE OUT
[2L] to display the
DISC OUT 1/5 page.
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN
¬DISCRETE OUT
¬UNILINK MENU
1/2 page displays with a list
of all available options.
DISC
OUT
OPT
¡ not used
vox annun
£ new msg ¡
¢ new msg
vhf nocomm
§ sat nocomm
¶ tel nocomm
OUT
OPT
¡ vdr box sel
chime ¡
£ chime
¢ fans visual
fans aural
§ cpdlc cnect
¬UNILINK MENU
º§z
RETURN®
DISC OUT 1/5
STORE®
active state
ground
active state
ground
active state
ground
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
disc out ¡
not used
disc out
not used
disc out £
not used
3 Enter
the number of the
desired option and press
ENTER. For more options,
press NEXT to display the
the DISC OUT OPT 2/2 page.
--:--z
RETURN®
¬UNILINK MENU
DISC
1/2
select
#-
GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
2 Press
LSK [2L] to configure
DISC OUT 1. The DISC OUT OPT
SERIAL®
2/2
select
#-
4 Press
LSK [2R] and toggle the
active state of the DISC OUT 1
between GROUND and OPEN.
--:--z
RETURN®
5 Repeat
steps 2, 3, and 4 until all
14 discrete outputs are set and then
press RETURN [5R].
23-20-06
Page 441
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(3)
ARINC Receive
1 Press
ARINC RECEIVE [3L]
to display the ARINC RX
1/3 page.
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN
SERIAL®
¬DISCRETE OUT
GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
2 Press
LSK [2L] to configure
PORT 1. The ARINC RX OPT page
displays with a list of the
available options for Port 1.
NOTE: Choosing Ports 2 - 16
displays one of ARINC RX
OPT 1/4 pages.
ARINC
¡
£
¢
§
fms/cdu¡
fms/cdu
fms/cdu£
mcdu¡
mcdu
mcdu£
ARINC
¡
£
¢
§
¶
RX
RX
OPT
select
#-
OPT
1/4
select
#-
¡
£
¢
§
¶
RX 1/3
port ¡
fms/cdu¡
port
¶¢¡ sdu
port £
not used
¬UNILINK MENU
STORE®
port ¢
not used
port
not used
port §
not used
--:--z
RETURN®
3 Enter
the number of the desired
option for port 1 and press ENTER.
OPT
dhc iop¡
dhc iop
mcdu¡
mcdu
mcdu£
¶º fms¡
¶º fms
4 After
configuring all the ports
on the chosen ARINC RX OPT page,
press NEXT to go to the next ARINC
RX OPT page.
--:--z
RETURN®
RX
ARINC
This automatically returns you to
the ARINC RX 1/3 page. Select
another port to configure. The
ARINC RX OPT 1/4 page displays.
not used
fms/cdu
fms/cdu£
¶¢º print
¶¢¡ sdu
vm cmc
§º¢ cmc
ARINC
--:--z
RETURN®
¬UNILINK MENU
2/4
select
#-
5 Repeat
steps 2 and 3 until all
16 ARINC RX ports are set and
then push RETURN [5R].
--:--z
RETURN®
ARINC
¡
£
¢
§
¶
RX
OPT
¶º fms£
¶¢£a gnss
¶º vdr
test
adc¡
adc
generic¡
3/4
select
#-
ARINC
¡
£
RX
OPT
generic
generic£
generic¢
4/4
select
#-
--:--z
RETURN®
--:--z
RETURN®
23-20-06
Page 442
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(4)
ARINC Transmit
1 Press
ARINC TRANSMIT [4L]
to display the ARINC TX 1/3
page.
I/O
CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN
¬DISCRETE
SERIAL®
OUT
GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC
RECEIVE
¬ARINC
TRANSMIT
¬UNILINK MENU
ARINC
2 PORT
1 SPEED defaults to LOW.
Press PORT 2 SPEED [3L] and
select the LOW or HIGH
speed option. Repeat
for the rest of the ARINC
TX ports. Ports 4 - 8 are
on ARINC TX pages 2 and 3.
TX
port ¡ speed
low
port speed
low
port £ speed
low
¬UNILINK MENU
--:--z
RETURN®
1/3
STORE®
devices
PORT 1®
PORT
2®
PORT 3®
--:--z
RETURN®
4 Press
LSK [1L] and <*>
3 Press
PORT 1 [2R] to display the
appears to indicate that the
ARINC TX OPT 1/3 page. A list of
item is selected. Press the
LSK again and <*> disappears.
Repeat for each device.
ARINC TX OPT 1/3
port ¡
¬FMS/CDU1<*>
741 SDU®
¬FMS/CDU2
¬FMS/CDU3
¬740 PRINT
¬UNILINK MENU
VOX
TUNE®
devices available for each of the
ARINC TX ports displays.
NOTE: Multiple port devices
can be configured on
a single port but no
device may be configured
so that it resides
on more than one port.
VM CMC®
604 CMC®
--:--z
RETURN®
5 Press
NEXT to display ARINC
TX 2/3 and follow the procedure
in step 4. Press NEXT again to display
ARINC TX 3/3. Once all ARINC TX ports
are configured, press RETURN twice to
return to the I/O CONFIG page.
23-20-06
Page 443
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(5)
Serial Port Configuration
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN
SERIAL®
¬DISCRETE OUT
GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
¬UNILINK MENU
1 Press SERIAL [1R] to
display the SERIAL 1/2
page.
¬ARINC RECEIVE
--:--z
RETURN®
2 Press
PORT 1 [1L] to
display the SERIAL OPT 1/2
page.
SERIAL
port ¡
not used
port
not used
port £
not used
port ¢
not used
¬UNILINK MENU
SERIAL
¡
£
¢
§
¶
1/2
select
not used
#lo-res display
aero-m
printer
vhr gnd sim
sat gnd sim
iridium
--:--z
RETURN®
SERIAL
¡
£
hi-res
hi-res
tel sim
OPT
2/2
select
display ¡ #display
1/2
STORE®
--:--z
RETURN®
3 Type
the number of the desired
option and press ENTER. This
returns you to the SERIAL 1/2 page.
For more options, press NEXT to
display the SERIAL OPT 2/2 page.
OPT
--:--z
RETURN®
4 Repeat
steps 2 and 3 for each of the
six serial ports.
Once all serial ports are configured,
press RETURN to display the I/O CONFIG
page.
23-20-06
Page 444
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(6)
Graphics
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN
¬DISCRETE OUT
SERIAL®
GRAPHICS®
1 Press GRAPHICS [2R] to
display the GRAPHICS page.
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
¬UNILINK MENU
--:--z
RETURN®
2 Press CDU/MFD BAUD RATE
[1L]
to toggle between 9600BPS and
19.2KBPS.
3 the
Press LSK [2L] to display and select
graphics configuration for CDU1.
GRAPHICS
cdu/mfd baud rate
¡ª.kbps
STORE®
cdu¡ graphics disp on
cdu graphics disp on
cdu£ graphics disp on
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
CDU#
4 Graphics
options are CDU, RCDU,
MFD-LR, HR1, and HR2. An <*> appears
to indicate that the item is selected.
Press the LSK again and <*> disappears.
All or none of the options may be
chosen.
GRAPHICS
¬CDU<*>
HR1®
¬RCDU
HR2®
¬MFD-LR
¬UNILINK MENU
--:--z
RETURN®
Press RETURN to return to the
GRAPHICS page.
5 When
all CDU graphics displays are configured, press RETURN twice to return to the
SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for CDU2 and CDU3.
23-20-06
Page 445
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
J.
VHF Configuration
SYS
1 Push VHF CONFIG [2L]
to display the VHF
CONFIG 1/2 page.
¬I/O
CONFIG
CONFIG
STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG
TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG
POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY
¬UNILINK MENU
2 Push RADIO TYPE [1L] to cycle
through the RADIO TYPE options.
Push all other configuration
options to cycle through and
choose the options.
1/4
--:--z
REVIEW®
VHF CONFIG 1/2
radio type
INTERNAL VDR
STORE®
contact timer
arinc
ENABLED
DISABLED
tracker timer
sita
ENABLED
DISABLED
preferred dsp
avicom
NONE
DISABLED
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
3 Push NEXT to display the VHF
CONFIG 2/2 page.
4 Push ENABLED MODE(S) [1L] to
cycle through the ENABLED
MODE(S) options. Push all other
configuration options to cycle
through and choose the options.
VHF CONFIG 2/2
enabled mode(s)
POA/AOA
STORE®
minimum sqp
sqp threshold
12
voice freq control
DISABLED
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
5 Push RETURN to display the SYS
CONFIG 1/4 page.
23-20-06
Page 446
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
K.
Satellite (SAT) Configuration
SYS
1 Press SAT CONFIG [3L]
to display the SAT
CONFIG page.
CONFIG
1/4
¬I/O
CONFIG
STORE®
¬VHF
CONFIG
TEL
CONFIG®
¬SAT
CONFIG
POS
REPORT®
¬PRIORITY
¬UNILINK MENU
2 Press TRACKER TIMER
[1L] and select ENABLED
or DISABLED. Press AUTO
RETURN [2L] and select
ENABLED or DISABLED.
SAT CONFIG
tracker timer
ENABLED
auto return
ENABLED
¬UNILINK MENU
REVIEW®
--:--z
STORE®
--:--z
RETURN®
3 Press RETURN [5R] to the
SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
23-20-06
Page 447
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
L.
Priority Configuration
SYS
¬I/O
1 Press
PRIORITY [4L] to
display the COMM
PRIORITY page.
2 Press
1ST [2L] to cycle
through the NORMAL options.
Based on which option is
chosen, not all options
will be seen for each
choice. Repeat for 2ND [3L]
and 3RD [4L].
CONFIG
CONFIG
¬VHF CONFIG
¬SAT
1/4
STORE®
TEL CONFIG®
CONFIG
POS
¬PRIORITY
¬UNILINK MENU
REPORT®
REVIEW®
--:--z
COMM PRIORITY
normal
¬¡st sat
STORE®
alternate
none ¡st®
¬nd none
none nd®
£rd none
none £rd®
--:--z
RETURN®
¬UNILINK MENU
3 Press
1ST [2R] to cycle
through the ALTERNATE
options. Based on which
option is chosen, not all
options will be seen for
each choice. Repeat for 2ND
[3R] and 3RD [4R].
4 Press
RETURN [5R] to show the
SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
23-20-06
Page 448
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
M.
Telephony (TEL) Configuration
SYS
CONFIG
1/4
¬I/O CONFIG
STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG
TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG
POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY
¬UNILINK MENU
1 display
Press TEL CONFIG [2R] to
the TEL CONFIG 1/2
page.
REVIEW®
--:--z
2 select
Press AIR PHONE [1L] to
the option for
telephony communications.
3 enter
Press ACCESS NUMBER [2L] and
up to 19 alphanumeric
characters for the primary
telephone access number.
Press ENTER when completed.
NOTE: Contact your DSP to
obtain the correct access
number.
TEL CONFIG 1/2
air phone
IRIDIUM
STORE®
access number
------------------wx maps
DISABLED
BAUD RATE
¢ººbps
susp msg
ENABLED
--:--z
4 orPressDISABLED
WX MAPS [3L] to toggle the ENABLED
option for each. Repeat for
SUSP MSG [4L].
NOTE: If IRIDIUM is chosen as the AIR
PHONE option, WX MAPS, in the window
above, displays a BAUD RATE option that
can be selected at LSK [3R].
5 TEL
Press NEXT to display the
CONFIG 2/2 page.
Press REDIAL PAUSE [1L] and
enter a pause of 5 to 60
seconds.
Press DIAL ATTEMPTS [2L] and
enter a number of dial attempts
of 1 to 6.
Press AUTO-DELAY [3L] and
enter a delay of 1 to 9 minutes.
TEL CONFIG
redial pause
£ºsec
dial attempts
§
auto-delay
min
¬UNILINK MENU
2/2
STORE®
--:--z
RETURN®
Press RETURN [5R] to display
the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
23-20-06
Page 449
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
N.
Position Report Configuration
SYS
¬I/O
CONFIG
CONFIG
STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG
¬SAT
1/4
TEL CONFIG®
CONFIG
POS
¬PRIORITY
¬UNILINK MENU
REPORT®
1 Press
POS REPORT [3R]
to display the POS
REPORT page.
REVIEW®
--:--z
2 Press
AUTOMATIC
REPORTING: IN AIR
[2L] and select
ENABLED OR DISABLED.
3 Press
ON GROUND [3L]
and and select
ENABLED OR DISABLED.
4 Press
IN AIR DEFAULT [4L]
and select ENABLED OR
POS REPORT
automatic
reporting:
STORE®
in air
air intv
ENABLED
15MINS
on ground
ground intv
DISABLED
60MINS
in air default
DISABLED
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
5 Press
AIR INTV [2R] and
enter the number of
minutes.
DISABLED.
6 Press
GROUND INTV [3R]
and enter the number of
minutes.
7 Press
RETURN [5R] to display
the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page and
perform the Configuration
Review.
23-20-06
Page 450
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
O.
Configuration Review
SYS
¬I/O
CONFIG
CONFIG
STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG
¬SAT
1/4
TEL CONFIG®
CONFIG
POS
¬PRIORITY
¬UNILINK MENU
REPORT®
REVIEW®
--:--z
1 Press
REVIEW [4R] to
display the REVIEW 1/22
page.
NOTE: The REVIEW pages are a visual representation of the contents of the
UniLink Configuration Module. After reviewing all pages for errors, press
NEXT on the keypad to return to the REVIEW Page 1. If the
configuration is correct, press RETURN LSK [5R] to display SYS CONFIG 1/4.
Press STORE [1R] twice to save the configuration. If errors were noted during the
review, it will be necessary to return to the appropriate configuration page
to make the changes.
REVIEW 1/22
discrete in:
disc in
º¡:not used
º:not used
active state
ground
ground
¬PRINT
SEND®
--:--z
RETURN®
¬UNILINK MENU
2 Press
SEND [4R] to transmit a
Configuration Report downlink.
NOTE: When SEND is pressed, the
QUEUED message displays over the
SEND LSK.
3 Press
NEXT to display the each
sequential review page.
º£:not
º¢:not
º:not
º§:not
º¶:not
º:not
ºª:not
¡º:not
REVIEW 2/22
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
¬UNILINK MENU
ground
ground
ground
ground
ground
ground
ground
ground
--:--z
RETURN®
23-20-06
Page 451
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
REVIEW 3/22
discrete out:
active state
disc out
º¡:not used
ground
ground
º:not used
º£:not used
ground
º¢:not used
ground
ground
º:not used
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
REVIEW 5/22
¡¢:not used
º§:not
º¶:not
º:not
ºª:not
¡º:not
¡¡:not
¡:not
¡£:not
REVIEW 4/22
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
¬UNILINK MENU
REVIEW 6/22
º§:not used
º¶:not used
º:not used
ºª:not used
¡º:not used
¡¡:not used
¡:not used
¡£:not used
arinc rx:
rx port º¡:fms/cdu¡
rx port º:not used
rx port º£:not used
rx port º¢:not used
rx port º:not used
rx
rx
rx
rx
rx
rx
rx
rx
¬UNILINK MENU
¬UNILINK MENU
ground
--:--z
RETURN®
ground
ground
ground
ground
ground
ground
ground
ground
--:--z
RETURN®
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
--:--z
RETURN®
arinc tx:
tx port º¡:fms/cdu¡
speed:low
tx port º:--------
REVIEW 8/22
speed:low
tx port º£:-------speed:low
tx port º¢:-------speed:low
tx port º:-------speed:low
tx port º§:--------
¬UNILINK MENU
¬UNILINK MENU
REVIEW 7/22
rx port ¡¢:not used
rx port ¡:not used
rx port ¡§:not used
--:--z
RETURN®
REVIEW 9/22
speed:low
tx port º¶:-------speed:low
tx port º:-------speed:low
serial:
port ¡: not used
¬UNILINK MENU
--:--z
RETURN®
REVIEW 11/22
cdu¡:----------cdu:----------cdu£:----------vhf config:
radio:none
contact timer:enabled
tracker timer:enabled
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
port
port
port
port
port
--:--z
RETURN®
REVIEW 10/22
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
:
£:
¢:
:
§:
graphics:
cdu/mfd baud:¡ª.kbps
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
REVIEW 12/22
preferred dsp:none
arinc:disabled
sita:disabled
avicom:disabled
enabled mode:poa/aoa
minimum sqp:¢
sqp threshold:¡
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
23-20-06
Page 452
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
sat config:
tracker timer:disabled
auto return:disabled
REVIEW 14/22
normal ¡st:vhf
normal nd:none
normal £rd:none
alternate ¡st:none
alternate nd:none
alternate £rd:none
comm priority:
tel config:
REVIEW 13/22
voice freq ctrl:
disabled
¬UNILINK MENU
--:--z
RETURN®
REVIEW 15/22
air phone:none
access number:
-------------------wx maps:disabled
susp msg:enabled
baud rate:¢ººbps
redial pause:£ºsec
dial attempts:§
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
REVIEW 17/22
sys config ÷¢:
media advis:enabled
met data:disabled
flight no.:disabled
oooi data:disabled
aircraft:
¬UNILINK MENU
--:--z
RETURN®
REVIEW 19/22
pushback:disabled
departure:disabled
exp taxi:disabled
alerts:
alert¡:ººººms
alert:ººººms
chime¡:ººººms
¬UNILINK MENU
--:--z
RETURN®
REVIEW 21/22
fans aural:ºms
delay msg tx:ººmin
ground delay:ººmin
fans latency:ºsec
supp addr:-------
--:--z
RETURN®
¬UNILINK MENU
REVIEW 16/22
auto-delay:min
pos report:
in air:enabled
on ground:disabled
in air default:disabled
air intv:¡min
ground intv:§ºmin
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
RETURN®
REVIEW 18/22
type:---registration:------airline id:--÷--fin number:--icao addr:-------clearances:
oceanic:disabled
¬UNILINK MENU
--:--z
RETURN®
REVIEW 20/22
chime:ººººms
inhib on gnd:ººkts
inhib alt:¡ººººft
alt type:baro
after off:ºmin
sys config £÷¢:
fans:enabled
¬UNILINK MENU
--:--z
RETURN®
REVIEW 22/22
date
time
§-aug-¡¡
¡¶ºz
§-aug-¡¡
¡¶ºz
§-aug-¡¡
¡¶ºz
sys config ¢÷¢:
config mod updates:
¬UNILINK MENU
--:--z
RETURN®
¬UNILINK MENU
23-20-06
--:--z
RETURN®
Page 453
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Maintenance, Checkout, and Troubleshooting
1.
UniLink Ground Checkout Procedures
A.
Post Installation Test
For instructions on testing the UniLink following the initial installation in an aircraft, the
installer should refer to the installation Ground and/or Flight Test Plans that are part of the
UniLink installation (TC, STC, Field Approval) certification package.
The installation approval applicant should contact Universal Avionics Certification
Department for Ground and/or Flight Test Plan templates that can be used for developing
customized test plans.
B.
Return to Service
The following defines the conditions under which tests, specified below, should be
conducted.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
C.
Safety Precautions
User should follow all appropriate safety precautions.
Power Input
Unless otherwise specified, tests should be conducted with the equipment powered by
the aircraft’s electrical power generating system.
Associated Equipment or Systems
Unless otherwise specified, turn on all aircraft electrically operated equipment and
systems before conducting these tests.
Environment
During tests, the equipment should not be subjected to environmental conditions that
exceed those specified by the equipment manufacturer.
Warm-up Period
No warm-up period is required. However, some time must be allowed for all
associated equipment to boot up properly and stabilize.
UniLink to FMS/CDU Communications
NOTE: This procedure should be completed for each FMS/CDU connected to the
UniLink.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Verify that DATA 1/4 page is displayed an active UNILINK prompt.
From the DATA 1/4 page, press the UNILINK LSK [3R] and verify the UNILINK
MENU 1/2 page is displayed.
Press RETURN LSK [5R]. Verify that the DATA 1/4 page is displayed.
Repeat test steps 1 through 3 for each FMS/CDU connected and configured for
UniLink.
23-20-06
Page 501
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
D.
Version Check
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
E.
Device Status
(1)
(2)
(3)
F.
From the UNILINK MENU Page 1, press NEXT.
Press MAINTENANCE LSK [4L].
Press VERSIONS LSK [3L].
Verify the correct UniLink SCN and Part Number appears on the screen.
Ensure all peripheral devices are powered on.
Press the DEVICE STATUS LSK [1L] on the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page.
Verify that the device status is OK for all applicable configured peripheral devices
such as FMSs, MCDUs, CDUs, low and high resolution graphics devices, and CVRs.
Press NEXT to cycle thru the DEVICES pages.
UniLink to Display Processor RS-422 Communications
This procedure applies only to display devices wired and configured to support weather
graphics.
(1)
From the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page, press the TESTS LSK [2R].
(2)
Press the IMAGE LSK [2L].
(3)
The IMAGE TEST IN PROGRESS pop-up message will appear.
(4)
Verify that the test image below is presented on all appropriate display devices.
NOTE: •
•
This is a Low Resolution test image and will be displayed as such on High
Resolution display devices as well. UniLink does not generate a High
Resolution test image.
It is recommended that you delete the test image following test completion.
23-20-06
Page 502
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
G.
UL-801 VHF Communications
VHF datalink service coverage on the ground may be limited. Coverage may be affected by
ground obstacles and may be restricted due to poor line of sight of the VHF ground station
antenna.
(1)
The VHF communications status is indicated on the UniLink COMM STATUS page.
Press COMM STATUS LSK [4L] on the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page.
(2)
If VHF COMM STATUS is COMM/IDLE, a request for ATIS information can be
performed on the ground. Otherwise, if the VHF COMM STATUS is
NOCOMM/SCANNING, the aircraft should be relocated elsewhere until the status of
COMM/IDLE is obtained.
(3)
To request D-ATIS, from the UNILINK MENU Page 1:
• Press the FLIGHT INFO LSK.
• Press the D-ATIS LSK.
• Press AIRPORT. Type KORD, for example, or your airport identifier.
• Press LSK [ENTER].
• Press SEND to transmit the request.
− If QUEUED is displayed above the SEND prompt, the VHF probably is not
connected to the ACARS system.
− If Sending, SENT is displayed. The request was received and acknowledged.
Your request will be shortly received by UniLink and available for viewing.
H.
OOOI Sensor Test
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Ensure Door and Park Brake discrete inputs are connected and configured.
From UNILINK MENU 2/2 page, press the MAINTENANCE LSK [4L].
Press SENSOR STATUS LSK [2L].
Open and close the door.
Verify the DOORS status changes accordingly.
Release and set parking brake.
Verify the BRAKE status changes accordingly.
Verify the AIR/GROUND status is ON GROUND.
NOTE: If the aircraft is on jacks, the status will be IN AIR.
23-20-06
Page 503
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
I.
Printer Test
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
J.
Verify that printer power is on and has passed its self-test.
With the DATA page 1/4 displayed, press UNILINK LSK [3R]. The UNILINK
MENU 1/2 will display.
Press the NEXT key.
Press MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] to display the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page.
Press TESTS LSK [2R] to display the TESTS page.
Press PRINTER LSK [1L]. The printing message pop-up message will display and a
test pattern will be sent to the printer.
The TESTS page will again display.
Checking the UL-801 FANS ALERTS Output Discretes
This procedure applies only to FANS-enabled aircraft.
(1)
From the DATA 1/4 page, press UNILINK LSK [3R]. The UNILINK MENU 1/2
page will display.
(2)
Press the NEXT key.
(3)
Press MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] to display the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page.
(4)
Press TESTS LSK [2R] to display the TESTS page.
(5)
Press FANS ALERTS LSK [1R]. The FANS DISCRETE TEST IN PROGRESS popup message will appear.
(6)
Verify that all appropriate FANS Visual and Aural alerts activate momentarily.
K.
Checking the UL-801 Self-Test (Optional)
This test simply reboots the UniLink. After the reboot process, verify that the UniLink
prompt becomes active.
L.
Checking the UL-801 Weather Graphics using a SatCom-based
Telephony System
NOTE:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Ensure that the selected DSP supports Weather Graphics uplinks.
Press the DATA key to display the DATA 1/4 page.
Press UNILINK LSK [3R] to display UNILINK MENU 1/2.
Press WX MAPS LSK [2R] to display the WX MAP REQUEST page.
Press SIG WX LSK [2R] and the SIGNIFICANT WX page will display.
Press SEND LSK [4R]. This prompts UniLink to place a call to the selected DSP.
The QUEUED and SENDING messages display. After a few minutes, the FMS
UniLink will display NEW WX ADVISORY under the ADVISORY area. Press the
LSK to the left of the ADVISORY message to display the message.
a) If a UniLink page is not currently displayed on the FMS, the MSG icon light will
flash.
Press the MSG key on the FMS to display the MESSAGES 1/X page. The UNILINK
WX MAP RCVD message will appear.
Pressing the UniLink prompt will display the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page.
23-20-06
Page 504
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
(9)
M.
Press LSK [5L] to display the weather map. Verify that the correct map has been
received.
Checking the UL-801 ARINC 741 SatCom (SAT)
NOTE:
Ensure that the selected DSP provides this service.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Verify that the SatCom SDU is powered up, initialized, and logged on.
From the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page, press COMM STATUS.
If the SatCom status is NOCOMM/UNAVAILABLE, UniLink has not detected label
270 from the SatCom. This indicates the Sat Link is unavailable.
(4)
If the SatCom status is NOCOMM/CONNECTING, the SatCom Link is available,
UniLink will send a Link Test message, and wait for an acknowledgement from the
ACARS network to confirm connectivity to the network.
(5)
If SatCom status is COMM/IDLE, the SatCom Link connectivity to the ACARS
network has been confirmed and UniLink is ready to send and receive messages via
the SatCom link.
All tests are now complete.
23-20-06
Page 505
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
2.
Error Messages
A complete list of defined error messages is shown in the following tables:
•
•
•
•
A.
The Pop-up Error Messages table shows the error conditions that result in a pop-up
window error message. These errors are deemed significant enough to warrant
immediate, detailed annunciation.
The General Error Messages table shows the general error messages that may result in a
NEW ERROR MSG advisory alert, as well as the recommended actions for resolution.
The Configuration Error Messages shows possible configuration error messages, as well
as the recommended actions for resolution.
The Hidden Error/Status Messages shows unannunciated error/status messages that are
normally hidden from the error log.
Pop-up Window Error Messages
Pop-up Window Error Messages
Pop-up Window Text
Condition
FMS/MCDU CONFIG ERROR. CONFIG NOT
SAVED.
User attempt to STORE configuration data that does
not configure the same FMS or MCDU on RX Port 1
and TX Port 1.
FMS/VDR SHARE TX PORT. CONFIG NOT
SAVED.
User attempt to STORE configuration data with an
ARINC 429 transmit port configured to interface to both
a UASC FMS and an ARINC 750 VDR.
FMS/MCDU CONFIG ERROR. CONFIG NOT
SAVED
User attempt to STORE configuration data with both a
UASC FMS/CDU and an MCDU configured together.
UNABLE TO WRITE TO CONFIG MODULE.
User attempt to STORE configuration data with
Configuration Module error.
DISPLAY PROCESSOR FAIL
A configured display processor has failed or
experienced a communication failure, or too many bad
slots have been detected.
23-20-06
Page 506
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
B.
General Error Messages
UniLink error messages may be found by using either of the following two processes:
(1)
(2)
Press the MSG key to see the messages.
a) Press the NEXT key to scroll through the messages.
Press the MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] on the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page.
a) Press the ERROR LOG LSK [4L] on the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page.
NOTE:
The Error Log contains all error messages including configuration
error messages. The messages found when pressing the MSG key are
only applicable to configuration errors.
b) Press the NEXT key to scroll through the messages.
General Error Messages
Text
Action/Description
FMS1 INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and FMS1. If condition persists
contact UASC.
FMS2 INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and FMS2. If condition persists
contact UASC.
FMS3 INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and FMS3. If condition persists
contact UASC.
CDU1 DP INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and CDU1. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
CDU2 DP INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and CDU2. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
CDU3 DP INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and CDU3. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
REMOTE CDU1 DP INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and RCDU1. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
REMOTE CDU2 DP INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and RCDU2. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
REMOTE CDU3 DP INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and RCDU3. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
MFD-LR1
INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and MFD1. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
23-20-06
Page 507
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
General Error Messages
Text
Action/Description
MFD-LR2
INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and MFD2. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
MFD-LR3
INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and MFD3. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
HR-1
INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and high-resolution display 1
(MFD-640 or EFI-890R). If condition persists contact
UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular
device, examine connection between the graphics
display device and UniLink.
HR-2
INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and high-resolution display 2
(MFD-640 or EFI-890R). If condition persists contact
UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular
device, examine connection between the graphics
display device and UniLink.
MCDU1 INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and MCDU1. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
MCDU2 INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and MCDU2. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
MCDU3 INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and MCDU3. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
HF RADIO INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and HF radio.
SDU INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and SDU. If condition persists
contact UASC.
TEL INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and telephone system. If
condition persists contact UASC.
CMC INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and CMC. If condition persists
contact UASC.
A740 PRINTER INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and Printer. If condition
persists contact UASC.
SERIAL PRINTER INOP
No action required. Temporary condition that will
correct with next job UniLink sends to printer.
VHF VDLM2 RADIO INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and radio. If condition persists
contact UASC.
THE SYSTEM IS RUNNING LOW ON NVRAM
AND SHOULD BE RESTARTED.
Cycle power to UniLink.
THE SYSTEM IS CRITICALLY SHORT OF
NVRAM. SYSTEM RESTART IS IMMINENT.
Cycle power to UniLink.
23-20-06
Page 508
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
General Error Messages
Text
Action/Description
SERIAL PRINTER FAILURE
Examine the printer and its serial and power
connections.
PRINT JOB TOO LARGE
No action required. UniLink has attempted to forward a
corrupted uplink to the printer. Re-request uplink data.
[Hardware port] FAIL
example:
ARINC TX PORT 1 FAIL
Cycle power to UniLink. If condition persists contact
UASC.
THE FATAL ERROR LOG HAS BEEN
CORRUPTED
No action required. Old messages are discarded and
the log is automatically restarted.
THE FATAL ERROR LOG CONTAINS A NEW
ENTRY
No action required. If condition is frequent, contact
UASC.
PROTOCOL ERROR LOG CORRUPT.
OLD PROTOCOL ERRORS DISCARDED.
LOGGING OF PROTOCOL ERRORS WILL
RESTART.
No action required. Old messages are discarded and
protocol error logging is automatically restarted.
LINK ERROR LSK [device name, count, first/last No action required. Protocol errors are automatically
occurrence]
corrected, usually with no impact to the user. If
PROTOCOL ERROR LSK [device name, count, condition is frequent for a particular device, examine
connection between device and UniLink.
first/last occurrence]
CTS BUSY LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
CTS TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
No action required. Protocol errors are automatically
corrected, usually with no impact to the user. If
condition is frequent for a particular device, examine
connection between device and UniLink.
MSG RETRY LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
SYN LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
MSG TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
DSC RETRY LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
DSC TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
SPW RETRY LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
SPW TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
TX BUF FULL LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
RX PORT 1: UASC FMS DETECTED.
OVERRIDING PORT CONFIGURATION FOR
MCDU
Configure UniLink with ARINC receive port 1 as
FMS/CDU1 and transmit port 1 as FMS/CDU1.
RX PORT 1: MCDU DETECTED. OVERRIDING Configure UniLink with ARINC receive port 1 as
PORT CONFIGURATION FOR UASC FMS
MCDU1 and transmit port 1 as MCDU1.
23-20-06
Page 509
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
General Error Messages
Text
Action/Description
STATUS TIMEOUT LSK [count, first/last
occurrence]
No action required. Protocol errors are automatically
corrected, usually with no impact to the user. If
ENQ TIMEOUT LSK [count, first/last occurrence] condition is frequent, examine connection between the
printer and UniLink.
RECORD TIMEOUT LSK [count, first/last
occurrence]
RECORD RESEND LSK [count, first/last
occurrence]
PRINTER FAIL LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
DOOR OPEN LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
TEST LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
INIT LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
OVERRUN LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
BUSY LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
INVALID CTS LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
ERASE FAULT LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device,
examine connection between the graphics display
TOO MANY FAILED SLOTS LSK [device name, device and UniLink.
count, first/last occurrence]
UNEXPECTED EOF LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
UNKNOWN IMAGE FORMAT LSK [device
name, count, first/last occurrence]
GIF ERROR LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
TRANSMIT FAIL LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
INVALID GX HEADER LSK [count, first/last
occurrence]
If condition is recent or frequent, examine connection
between telephone system and UniLink.
VDL MODE A NOT SUPPORTED
Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
VDL MODE 2 NOT SUPPORTED
Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
VDR TX WARN FAULT
Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
VDR STATUS FAULT
Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
CTRL PROTOCOL CMU ERROR
Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
CTRL PROTOCOL VDR ERROR
Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
ACARSIP CMU ERROR
Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
23-20-06
Page 510
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
General Error Messages
Text
Action/Description
ACARSIP VDR ERROR
Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
ASIP CMU ERROR
Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
ASIP VDR ERROR
Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
VDR SOFTWARE LOAD FAULT
Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
contact UASC.
23-20-06
Page 511
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
C.
Configuration Error Messages
Configuration Error Messages
Text
Action
MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR--UNABLE TO Attempt to store configuration. If condition persists
LOAD CONFIGURATION MODULE.
contact UASC.
ERROR READING CONFIGURATION
MODULE FROM NON-VOLATILE MEMORY.
Attempt to store configuration. If condition persists
contact UASC.
CONFIGURATION MODULE CRC CODE
FAILURE.
Attempt to store configuration. If condition persists
contact UASC.
CONFIGURATION MODULE VERSION
INCOMPATIBLE WITH SOFTWARE-CONFIGURATION UPDATE REQUIRED.
Verify UniLink software update and configuration, and
store the configuration.
CONFIGURATION MODULE REVISION
OLDER THAN SOFTWARE REVISION-CONFIGURATION UPDATE REQUIRED.
Verify UniLink software update and configuration, and
store the configuration.
AN ADC AND AN IOP BUS MAY NOT BE
CONFIGURED TOGETHER
An IOP bus cannot be configured concurrently with a
DADC. Configure UniLink accordingly.
CONFIGURATION UPDATED FROM OLDER
FORMAT. SOME DEFAULT VALUES USED.
CONFIGURATION SHOULD BE VERIFIED
AND RESAVED.
Once the configuration has been stored this message
will not appear. A newer configuration revision should
be used.
CONFIGURATION MODULE REVISION
NEWER THAN SOFTWARE REVISION-EXTRA DATA IGNORED.
Once the configuration has been stored this message
will not appear.
ONE OR MORE ARINC DEVICES HAS A
TRANSMIT PORT BUT NO RECEIVE PORT.
Configure UniLink with a receive port for each
configured transmit port listed on the ARINC
TRANSMIT page.
ONE OR MORE ARINC DEVICES HAS A
RECEIVE PORT BUT NO TRANSMIT PORT.
Configure UniLink with a transmit port for each
configured receive port listed on the ARINC RECEIVE
page.
THE SAME DEVICE IS ASSIGNED TO MORE
THAN ONE ARINC 429 TRANSMIT PORT.
Any given device cannot be configured on more than
one transmit port; configure UniLink accordingly.
AN A702 FMS OR GENERIC DEVICE IS
CONFIGURED BUT LACKS A DEFINITION IN
THE CUSTOMER DATABASE.
Load UniLink with a customer database that supports
an ARINC 702 FMS or generic device, as appropriate.
MULTIPLE CMC DEVICES CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink with either no CMC or a single
CMC, as appropriate, because UniLink cannot be
configured with multiple CMC devices.
THE UASC FMS THE ARINC 702 FMS AND
THE GNSS RECEIVER MAY NOT BE
CONFIGURED TOGETHER.
Configure UniLink with the same navigation source
only (i.e., the UASC FMS(s), the ARINC 702 FMS(s),
or the GNSS receiver) because UniLink cannot be
configured with dissimilar navigation sources
concurrently.
23-20-06
Page 512
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Configuration Error Messages
Text
Action
AN ADC AND A GNSS RECEIVER MAY NOT
BE CONFIGURED TOGETHER
Configure UniLink with DADC device(s) or GNSS
receiver. DADC and GNSS are dissimilar altitude
sources and cannot be configured concurrently,
configure UniLink accordingly.
AN ADC AND AN ARINC 702 FMS MAY NOT
BE CONFIGURED TOGETHER
A digital air data computer cannot be configured
concurrently with an ARINC 702 FMS, configure
UniLink accordingly.
AN IOP BUS MAY NOT BE CONFIGURED
TOGETHER WITH AN ARINC 702 FMS OR
THE GNSS RECEIVER.
An IOP bus cannot be configured concurrently with an
ARINC 702 FMS or with a GNSS receiver; configure
UniLink accordingly.
AN MCDU IS CONFIGURED BUT AN ARINC
702 FMS OR GNSS RECEIVER IS NOT
CONFIGURED.
When an MCDU is configured, configure UniLink with
an ARINC 702 FMS or a GNSS receiver.
IN ORDER FOR AN MCDU INSTALLATION TO
DISPLAY WEATHER MAPS AT LEAST ONE
DISPLAY MUST BE SET TO MFD-LR OR HR-1
OR HR-2
If the MCDU(s) is wired and configured as an ARINC
739A MCDU, configure UniLink with a low-resolution
MFD-640 and/or a high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R.
(See 0 and 2.)
IN ORDER FOR AN MCDU INSTALLATION TO If the MCDU(s) is wired and configured as an ARINC
DISPLAY WEATHER MAPS NO DISPLAY MAY 739A MCDU, configure UniLink with a low-resolution
BE SET TO CDU OR RCDU.
MFD-640 and/or a high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R.
Ensure no MCDU, wired as an ARINC 739A MCDU, is
configured as a CDU. (See 0 and 2).
MORE THAN TWO REMOTE CDU GRAPHIC
DEVICES CONFIGURED
Configure UniLink with no more than two RCDU
displays.
REMOTE CDU-1 CONFIGURED WITHOUT
PRIMARY CDU-1 CONFIGURED.
When configuring a remote CDU for graphics,
configure both the RCDU and the corresponding
primary CDU.
REMOTE CDU-2 CONFIGURED WITHOUT
PRIMARY CDU-2 CONFIGURED.
When configuring a remote CDU for graphics,
configure both the RCDU and the corresponding
primary CDU.
REMOTE CDU-3 CONFIGURED WITHOUT
PRIMARY CDU-3 CONFIGURED.
When configuring a remote CDU for graphics,
configure both the RCDU and the corresponding
primary CDU.
NO MORE THAN FOUR DISPLAY
PROCESSORS MAY BE CONFIGURED ON
THE LOW-RES DISPLAY PORT
Configure UniLink with four or fewer graphic devices
on the low-resolution display serial port.
ARINC TEST DEVICE CONFIGURED.
Remove the TEST DEV selection from any ARINC
RECEIVE port; it is used for test purposes only.
A VHF RADIO IS CONFIGURED BUT NO
VALID AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION IS
CONFIGURED.
When an A750 VDR is configured, configure UniLink
with a valid aircraft registration in the REGISTRATION
field on the A/C CONFIG page.
A VHF RADIO IS CONFIGURED BUT NO
VALID AIRLINE/AGENCY ID IS PRESENT.
Configure UniLink with a valid airline/agency identifier
in the left portion of the AIRLINE ID field on the A/C
CONFIG page.
23-20-06
Page 513
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Configuration Error Messages
Text
Action
SATCOM IS CONFIGURED BUT NO VALID
Configure UniLink either with a valid aircraft
AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION IS CONFIGURED. registration in the REGISTRATION field on the A/C
CONFIG page or with no ARINC transmit and receive
ports for an SDU.
SATCOM IS CONFIGURED BUT NO VALID
AIRLINE/AGENCY ID IS PRESENT.
Configure UniLink either with a valid airline/agency
identifier in the left portion of the AIRLINE ID field on
the A/C CONFIG page or with no ARINC transmit and
receive ports for an SDU.
AN AIR PHONE DEVICE IS CONFIGURED
BUT NO VALID TELEPHONE NUMBER IS
PRESENT.
Configure UniLink either with a valid telephone number
in the TEL ACCESS NUMBER field on the TEL
CONFIG 1/2 page or do not configure UniLink for an
air phone (NONE in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL
CONFIG 1/2 page).
A VALID TELEPHONE NUMBER IS PRESENT
BUT NO AIR PHONE DEVICE IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone
device in the AIR PHONE field or with no telephone
number in the TEL ACCESS NUMBER field on the
TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
VHF APPEARS IN NORMAL MEDIA PRIORITY Configure UniLink either with the correct VHF radio in
SELECTIONS BUT NO VHF RADIO IS
the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page
CONFIGURED.
or without VHF in any of the three NORMAL fields on
the COMM PRIORITY page.
VHF APPEARS IN ALTERNATE MEDIA
Configure UniLink either with the correct VHF radio in
PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO VHF RADIO the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page
IS CONFIGURED.
or without VHF in any of the three ALTERNATE fields
on the COMM PRIORITY page.
SATCOM APPEARS IN NORMAL MEDIA
PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO SDU IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and
receive ports for an SDU or without SAT in any of the
three NORMAL fields on the COMM PRIORITY page.
SATCOM APPEARS IN ALTERNATE MEDIA
PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO SDU IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink's ARINC transmit and receive ports
for an SDU or configure UniLink with no SAT in any of
the three ALTERNATE fields on the COMM PRIORITY
page.
TELEPHONY APPEARS IN NORMAL MEDIA
Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone
PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO AIR PHONE device in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG
DEVICE IS CONFIGURED.
1/2 page or without TEL in any of the three NORMAL
fields on the COMM PRIORITY page.
TELEPHONY APPEARS IN ALTERNATE
MEDIA PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO AIR
PHONE DEVICE IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone
device in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG
1/2 page or without TEL in any of the three
ALTERNATE fields on the COMM PRIORITY page.
VHF IS CONFIGURED BUT IS NOT IN EITHER Configure UniLink either with VHF in the desired
MEDIA PRIORITY LIST.
priority NORMAL and/or ALTERNATE fields on the
COMM PRIORITY page or with NONE in the RADIO
TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page.
23-20-06
Page 514
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Configuration Error Messages
Text
SATCOM IS CONFIGURED BUT IS NOT IN
EITHER MEDIA PRIORITY LIST.
Action
Configure UniLink either with SAT in the desired
priority NORMAL and/or ALTERNATE fields on the
COMM PRIORITY page or with no ARINC transmit
and receive ports for an SDU.
TELEPHONY IS CONFIGURED BUT IS NOT IN Configure UniLink either with TEL in the desired
EITHER MEDIA PRIORITY LIST.
priority NORMAL and/or ALTERNATE fields on the
COMM PRIORITY page or with NONE in the AIR
PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
THE VHF SIMULATOR INTERFACE IS
CONFIGURED. THIS INTERFACE IS FOR
DEVELOPMENT ONLY.
Remove the VHF GND SIM selection on the SERIAL
setup pages; it is used for test purposes only.
THE SATCOM SIMULATOR INTERFACE IS
CONFIGURED. THIS INTERFACE IS FOR
DEVELOPMENT ONLY.
Remove the SAT GND SIM selection on the SERIAL
setup pages; it is used for test purposes only.
THE TELEPHONY SIMULATOR INTERFACE IS Remove the TEL SIM selection on the SERIAL setup
CONFIGURED. THIS INTERFACE IS FOR
pages; it is used for test purposes only.
DEVELOPMENT ONLY.
A SERIAL PORT IS ASSIGNED TO IRIDIUM
BUT NO COMPATIBLE TELEPHONY DEVICE
IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with IRIDIUM in the AIR
PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or with no
serial port as IRIDIUM on the SERIAL setup pages.
THE CONFIGURED TELEPHONY DEVICE IS
/IRIDIUM BUT NO COMPATIBLE SERIAL
PORT IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct serial port as
IRIDIUM on the SERIAL setup pages or with NONE in
the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
A SERIAL PORT IS ASSIGNED TO AERO M
BUT NO COMPATIBLE TELEPHONY DEVICE
IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with T-T Aero-M in the AIR
PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or with no
serial port as Aero-M on the SERIAL setup pages.
THE CONFIGURED TELEPHONY DEVICE IS Configure UniLink either with the correct serial port as
AERO M BUT NO COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT Aero-M on the SERIAL setup pages or with NONE in
IS CONFIGURED.
the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
THE NEW-MESSAGE-ANNUNC-INHIBIT
FUNCTION IS CONFIGURED TO USE RADIO
ALTITUDE BUT NO IOP BUS IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with DHC8 IOPn in the
correct PORT n field on the ARINC RECEIVE pages
or with BARO in the ALT TYPE field on the ALERT
CONFIG page.
THE NEW-MESSAGE-ANNUNC-INHIBIT
Configure UniLink either with a value equal to or less
FUNCTION IS CONFIGURED TO USE RADIO than 2500 in the INHIB ALT field or with BARO in the
ALTITUDE BUT THE CONFIGURED ALTITUDE ALT TYPE field on the ALERT CONFIG page.
THRESHOLD VALUE IS TOO LARGE.
THE VHF VOX-ANNUN OUTPUT DISCRETE IS Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR
CONFIGURED BUT NO ARINC 750 VDR IS
in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2
CONFIGURED.
page or with no DISC OUT n field as VOX ANNUN on
the DISC OUT pages.
THE VDR MODE-SELECT OUTPUT DISCRETE Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR
IS CONFIGURED BUT NO ARINC 750 VDR IS in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2
CONFIGURED.
page or with no DISC OUT n field as VDR VOX SEL
on the DISC OUT pages.
23-20-06
Page 515
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Configuration Error Messages
Text
Action
THE VHF-NOCOMM OUTPUT DISCRETE IS
CONFIGURED BUT NO VHF RADIO IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct radio in the
RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page or
with no DISC OUT n field as VHF NOCOMM on the
DISC OUT pages.
THE SAT-NOCOMM OUTPUT DISCRETE IS
CONFIGURED BUT NO SDU IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and
receive ports for an SDU or with no DISC OUT n field
as SAT NOCOMM on the DISC OUT pages.
THE TEL-NOCOMM OUTPUT DISCRETE IS
CONFIGURED BUT NO TELEPHONE IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone in
the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or
with no DISC OUT n field as TEL NOCOMM on the
DISC OUT pages.
ARINC IS CONFIGURED BUT OOOI IS
DISABLED.
Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the OOOI
TIMES field on the SYS CONFIG 2/4 page or with
OFF in the ARINC field on the DSP SETUP page.
AN ARINC VOICE TUNE BUS TRANSMIT
Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR
PORT IS CONFIGURED BUT NO A750 VDR IS in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG page or
CONFIGURED.
with no ARINC transmit port with device VOICE TUNE
BUS.
AN ARINC TRANSMIT PORT IS CONFIGURED The VOX TUNE bus cannot be configured
FOR BOTH VOX TUNE AND SOME OTHER
concurrently with another device; configure UniLink
FUNCTION. THE VOX TUNE PORT CANNOT accordingly.
BE SHARED.
THE SETTINGS FOR VOICE FREQUENCY
TUNING, THE VOICE TUNE BUS, AND THE
VHF MODE-SELECT OUTPUT DISCRETE ARE
INCONSISTENT WITH ONE ANOTHER.
Configure UniLink either with:
The VOICE FREQ CONTROL field on the VHF
CONFIG page set to ENABLE 25 or ENABLE 8.33/25,
AND an ARINC transmit port with device VOICE
TUNE BUS, AND a DISC OUT n field configured as
VDR VOX SEL.
OR
The VOICE FREQ CONTROL field on the VHF
CONFIG page set to DISABLE, AND no ARINC
transmit port with device VOICE TUNE BUS, AND no
DISC OUT n field as VDR VOX SEL.
VHF VOICE FREQUENCY TUNING IS
ENABLED BUT NO A750 VDR IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR
in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG page or
with DISABLE in the VOICE FREQ CONTROL field on
the VHF CONFIG page.
WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED BUT NO AIR Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone in
PHONE IS CONFIGURED.
the AIR PHONE field or with DISABLED in the WX
MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
CDU 1 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and
FMS 1 OR MCDU 1 IS NOT CONFIGURED.
receive ports for FMS 1 or MCDU 1, as appropriate, or
with NONE in the CDU 1 GRAPHICS DISP ON field
on the GRAPHICS setup page.
23-20-06
Page 516
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Configuration Error Messages
Text
Action
CDU 2 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and
FMS 2 OR MCDU 2 IS NOT CONFIGURED.
receive ports for FMS 2 or MCDU 2, as appropriate, or
with NONE in the CDU 2 GRAPHICS DISP ON field
on the GRAPHICS setup page.
CDU 3 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and
FMS 3 OR MCDU 3 IS NOT CONFIGURED.
receive ports for FMS 3 or MCDU 3, as appropriate, or
with NONE in the CDU 3 GRAPHICS DISP ON field
on the GRAPHICS setup page.
AT LEAST ONE CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR
GRAPHICS BUT WEATHER MAPS ARE
DISABLED AND NO SERIAL LO- OR HI-RES
DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the WX
MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page and with
LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES
DISPLAY 2 in the correct PORT n field on the SERIAL
setup pages or with NONE in all CDU n GRAPHICS
DISP ON fields on the GRAPHICS setup page.
A SERIAL LO- or HI-RES DISPLAY IS
CONFIGURED BUT WEATHER MAPS ARE
DISABLED AND NO CDU IS CONFIGURED
FOR GRAPHICS.
Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the WX
MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page and with the
correct value in the appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS
DISP ON field(s) on the GRAPHICS setup page or
with no PORT n field as LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES
DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 on the SERIAL
setup pages.
WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED BUT NO
SERIAL LO- OR HI-RES DISPLAY IS
CONFIGURED AND NO CDU IS CONFIGURED
FOR GRAPHICS.
Configure UniLink either with LO-RES DISPLAY, HIRES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 in the correct
PORT n field on the SERIAL setup pages and with the
correct value in the appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS
DISP ON field(s) on the GRAPHICS setup page or
with DISABLED in the WX MAPS field on the TEL
CONFIG 1/2 page.
WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED AND A
SERIAL LO- or HI-RES DISPLAY IS
CONFIGURED BUT NO CDU IS CONFIGURED
FOR GRAPHICS.
Configure UniLink either with the correct value in the
appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON field(s) on
the GRAPHICS setup page or with DISABLED in the
WX MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page and
with no PORT n field as LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES
DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 on the SERIAL
setup pages.
WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED AND AT
LEAST ONE CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR
GRAPHICS BUT NO SERIAL LO- OR HI-RES
DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with LO-RES DISPLAY, HIRES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 in the correct
PORT n field on the SERIAL setup pages or with
DISABLED in the WX MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG
1/2 page and with NONE in all CDU n GRAPHICS
DISP ON fields on the GRAPHICS setup page.
AT LEAST ONE CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR
GRAPHICS AND A SERIAL LO- or HI-RES
DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED BUT WEATHER
MAPS ARE DISABLED.
Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the WX
MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or with
NONE in all CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON fields on the
GRAPHICS setup page and with no PORT n field as
LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES
DISLAY 2 on the SERIAL setup pages.
23-20-06
Page 517
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Configuration Error Messages
Text
Action
HR-1 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT Configure UniLink either with an HI-RES DISPLAY 1
NO HI-RES DISPLAY 1 SERIAL INTERFACE IS serial port or remove HR1 from the GRAPHICS setup
CONFIGURED.
configuration.
HR-2 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT Configure UniLink either with an HI-RES DISPLAY 2
NO HI-RES DISPLAY 2 SERIAL INTERFACE IS serial port or remove HR2 from the GRAPHICS setup
CONFIGURED.
configuration.
HI-RES DISPLAY 1 SERIAL INTERFACE IS
Configure UniLink either with a HR1 on the
CONFIGURED BUT NO HR-1 IS CONFIGURED GRPAHICS setup page or remove HI-RES DISPLAY 1
FOR GRAPHICS.
from the SERIAL configuration.
HI-RES DISPLAY 2 SERIAL INTERFACE IS
Configure UniLink either with a HR2 on the
CONFIGURED BUT NO HR-2 IS CONFIGURED GRPAHICS setup page or remove HI-RES DISPLAY 2
FOR GRAPHICS.
from the SERIAL configuration.
PRE-DEPARTURE CLEARANCE IS ENABLED Configure UniLink either with a valid four-character
BUT NO VALID AIRCRAFT TYPE IS PRESENT. ICAO aircraft type designator in the TYPE field on the
A/C CONFIG page or with DISABLED in the
PREDEPARTURE field on the CLEARANCES page.
A750 VDR CONFIGURED ON LOW-SPEED
TRANSMIT PORT.
Configure the ARINC 429 transmit port, which is
configured to A750 VDR, to HIGH speed.
A429 TRANSMIT PORT SET TO A750 VDR
AND VM CMC
Configure the ARINC 429 transmit port to either A750
VDR or VM (Vibro-Meter) CMC.
ARINC 429 PORTS CONFIGURED FOR ARINC Configure RADIO TYPE to A750 VDR.
750 VDR BUT VHF RADIO TYPE NOT SET TO
ARINC 750 VDR
VHF RADIO TYPE SET TO ARINC 750 VDR
BUT NO ARINC 429 PORTS ARE
CONFIGURED FOR AN ARINC 750 VDR.
Configure ARINC 429 transmit and receive ports to
A750 VDR.
VHF RADIO TYPE SET TO A750 VDR AND
VDR MODE-SELECT DISCRETE IS
CONFIGURED BUT THE DISCRETE ACTIVE
STATE IS NOT SET TO OPEN
If an A750 VDR is installed and VDR voice select
discrete is configured, set the discrete ‘active’ state to
‘OPEN’.
VHF RADIO CONFIGURED BUT ICAO
AIRCRAFT ADDRESS MISSING
Configure UniLink with a legal ICAO aircraft address,
which ranges from 00000001 octal through 77777776
octal and is normally included on the aircraft
registration document.
ILLEGAL ICAO AIRCRAFT ADDRESS
Configure UniLink with a legal ICAO aircraft address,
which ranges from 00000001octal through 77777776
octal and is normally included on the aircraft
registration document.
FANS DISABLED – NO VALID AIRCRAFT
REGISTRATION IS CONFIGURED
Configure UniLink either with a valid aircraft
registration in the REGISTRATION field on the A/C
CONFIG page or with FANS as DISABLED.
FANS DISABLED – VHF RADIO OR SDU NOT
CONFIGURED
Configure UniLink with a VHF radio and/or an SDU, or
do not configure FANS.
23-20-06
Page 518
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Configuration Error Messages
Text
Action
FANS DISABLED – ATC DATABASE NOT
INSTALLED
Configure UniLink with FANS functionality ENABLED
and load a valid ATC database or configure UniLink
with FANS disabled.
FANS DISABLED – DUAL UASC FMS NOT
CONFIGURED
Configure UniLink for two UASC FMSs or configure
UniLink with FANS disabled.
SQP MIN IS SET BELOW THREE
Configure SQP MIN with a value greater than three.
SQP THRESHOLD IS BELOW ONE OR ABOVE Configure the SQP threshold with a value greater than
EIGHT
one but less than eight.
CVR CONFIGURED ON LOW-SPEED
TRANSMIT PORT.
Configure the ARINC 429 transmit port, which is
configured to CVR, to HIGH speed or assign the CVR
to a high speed port.
NOTE 1:
If an MCDU is wired and configured as an ARINC 739A MCDU, which does not display
graphics, a low-resolution MFD-640 or a high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R must also be
configured in order to display graphics. If an MCDU is wired and configured as a UASC FMS
CDU, the MCDU is able to receive graphics and, therefore, no other device is necessary to
display graphics.
NOTE 2:
A low-resolution MFD-640 and high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R are configured on the
GRAPHICS setup page in the appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON field(s).
NOTE 3:
The SQP threshold is the difference between the SQP of the currently tracked ground station
and the value of the SQP of another ground station necessary to initiate a handoff.
D.
Hidden Error/Status Messages
Hidden Error/Status Messages
Text
UNKNOWN ERROR
Action/Description
Cycle power to UniLink. If condition persists
contact UASC.
THE PORTION OF FLASH MEMORY CONTAINING Cycle power to UniLink. If condition persists
THE MTBF COUNTER HAS BEEN CORRUPTED
contact UASC.
AND THE MTBF COUNT IS NO LONGER VALID
23-20-06
Page 519
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Appendix 1
This appendix contains industry-standard acronyms, abbreviations, and terms used in the UniLink
Installation manual.
1. Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Terms
Acronym/Abbreviation/Term
Description
ACARS
Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting
System
Acknowledgment
Air Data Computer
Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Contract
ATS Facilities Notification
Altitude
Altitude Reservation
ACARS Over Aviation VHF Link Control (AVLC)
Aeronautical (Airline) Operational Control
Aeronautical Radio, Incorporated (Data Interface Format
Standard
Air Traffic Control
Automatic Terminal Information System (see D-ATIS)
Air Traffic Management
Aeronautical Telecommunications Network
Air Traffic Services
Aviation VHF Link Control
Block Check Sequence
Current Data Authority
Customer Database
Control Display Unit
A full duplex bi-directional communication link in which
data is transmitted and received simultaneously. A hand
shake must be established prior to data being exchanged.
Supported by a UniLink RS-232 port configured for TEL.
Clearance
Configuration Module
Communication Management Unit
Communication Navigation Surveillance
Communication (also referred to as COM)
Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications
ACK
ADC
ADS-C
AFN
ALT
ALTRV
AOA
AOC
ARINC
ATC
ATIS
ATM
ATN
ATS
AVLC
BCS
CDA
CDB
CDU
Circuit Mode Data
CLX
CM
CMU
CNS
COMM
CPDLC
23-20-06
Page A1-1
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Acronym/Abbreviation/Term
Description
CRC
CSDB
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Commercial Standard Data Bus (Data Interface Format
Standard)
Clear to Send
Cockpit Voice and Flight Data Recorder (UASC)
Cockpit Voice Recorder
Digital Automatic Terminal Information System (also
referred to as ATIS)
Departure Clearance
Datalink Service Provider (also referred to as DSP)
Downlink Message
Display Processor
Differential Phase Shift Keying
Data Transfer Unit (UASC)
Data Transfer Unit-100 (UASC)
Datalink Service Provider (also referred to as DLSP)
Electronic Flight Bag
Electronic Flight Instrument
Electronic Flight Instrument-890R (UASC)
Electromagnetic Interference
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time of Departure
Expected
European Organisation For Civil Aviation Equipment
Federal Aviation Administration
Future Air Navigation Systems
Flight Level
Flight Number
Flight Management Computer (UASC)
Flight Management System (UASC)
Flight Plan
Frequency
Frequency Shift Keying
Ground Speed
Global Navigation Satellite System
Global Positioning System
CTS
CVFDR
CVR
D-ATIS
DEPT CLX
DLSP
DM
DP
DPSK
DTU
DTU-100
DSP
EFB
EFI
EFI-890R
EMI
ETA
ETD
EXP
EUROCAE
FAA
FANS
FL
FLT NO
FMC
FMS
FPL
FREQ
FSK
GND SPD
GNSS
GPS
23-20-06
Page A1-2
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Acronym/Abbreviation/Term
Description
HS
ICAO
ID
IFR
IOP
I/O
LAN
LOS
LRU
LS
LSK
MARSA
MCDU
MCDU
MCU
MDM
MFD
MIC
MSG
MSK
MVFR
ND
NDA
NOCOMM
NO CVG
NVM
ONBD
OOOI
High Speed
International Civil Aviation Organization
Identification, Identifier
Instrument Flight Rules
Input/Output Processor
Input/Output
Local Area Network
Line of Sight
Line-Replaceable Unit
Low Speed
Line Select Key
Military Assumes Responsibility for Separation of Aircraft
Multifunctional Control Display Unit (UASC)
Multi-Purpose Control Display Unit (ARINC)
Modular Concept Unit
Modem
Multifunction Display
Microphone
Message
Minimum Shift Keying
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
Navigation Display
Next Data Authority
No Communication
No Coverage
Non-volatile Memory
Onboard
Out, Off, On, In (used to detect and report changes to the
major flight phases of the aircraft)
23-20-06
Page A1-3
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Acronym/Abbreviation/Term
Description
Packet Mode Data
A half duplex bi-directional communication link in which
data is accumulated in packets of various lengths and sent
out in a burst or bursts so therefore does not support voice
communications. Packet switching is the process of routing
and transferring data by means of addressed packets so that
a channel is occupied during the transmission of the packet
only. Upon completion of the data transfer, the channel is
made available for the transfer of other traffic. Supported
by a UniLink ARINC port configured to provide VHF and
SAT capability.
Pre-departure Clearance
Primary Flight Display
Pilot Weather Report
Plain Old ACARS
Position
Push-to-Talk
Remote Control Display Unit
Received
Radio Frequency
Reports
Request to Send
Required
Route
Receive
Abbreviation for Satellite Communications Link. The SAT
link provides communication via Iridium Short Burst Data
(SBD) and packet mode data Inmarsat equipment that
utilizes a specific satellite constellation.
Satellite Communications
Software Control Number
Satellite Data Unit
Selective Calling
Significant Meteorological Information
Society of International Aeronautical Telecommunications
(Societe Internationale de Telecommunications
Aeronautiques)
Signal Quality Parameter
Solid State Data Transfer Unit (UASC)
PDC
PFD
PIREP
POA
POS
PTT
RCDU
RCVD
RF
RPTS
RTS
RQD
RTE
RX
SAT
SatCom
SCN
SDU
SELCAL
SIGMET
SITA
SQP
SSDTU
23-20-06
Page A1-4
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Acronym/Abbreviation/Term
Description
TEL
VOX
VSWR
WOW
WPT
Abbreviation for telephony. The telephony communication
link provides a circuit mode data connection via a dial-up
modem. A hand shake must be established prior to data
being exchanged. Only an RS-232 capable SatCom can be
used.
Terminal Weather Information for Pilots
Transmit
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation
UniLink (UASC)
Uplink Message
An Unverified message is one that does not contain
safeguards to prevent data corruption during transmission.
Such messages are labeled AOC on the page in which they
are displayed. See Verified Message.
Universal Serial Bus
Universal Time Coordinated
VHF Digital Link
VHF Data Radio
A Verified message is one that has been safeguarded
against potential data corruption during transmission and is
determined to be error-free using CRC code comparisons
and validity indicators. See Unverified Message.
Very High Frequency terrestrial-based packet mode. This is
a data communications link used for obtaining textual
weather, D-ATIS, and the transmission of position
reporting, OOOI, and safety services communications
(UniLink Flight Information Services). Does not support
weather graphics.
Voice
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
Weight On Wheels
Waypoint
WX
XMT
XOFF
XON
Weather
Transmit
Transmission Off
Transmission On
TWIP
TX
UASC
UL
UM
Unverified Message
USB
UTC
VDL
VDR
Verified Message
VHF
23-20-06
Page A1-5
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Appendix 2
This appendix contains UniLink Menus and subordinate menus. Pages illustrated with dashed boxes
are optional and are only available when the functionality reflected on the pages is enabled via
UniLink-configured options.
1.
UniLink Menus and Submenus – without FANS
A.
UniLink Menu 1/2
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Only available if OOOI is enabled in configuration.
Only available if VHF is enabled in configuration.
Only available if DATA is enabled in configuration.
Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration.
23-20-06
Page A2-1
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
UniLink Menu 1/2 – Continued
NOTES:
1. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration.
23-20-06
Page A2-2
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
B.
UniLink Menu 2/2
NOTES:
1. Check with DSP for availability of this feature.
23-20-06
Page A2-3
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
C.
Maintenance Menu
23-20-06
Page A2-4
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
D.
Configuration Menu
MAINTENCE 1/3
(continued from
previous page)
SYS CONFIG
1/4
I/O CONFIG
VHF CONFIG
SAT CONFIG
PRIORITY
TEL CONFIG
POS REPORT
DISC IN
DISC OUT
ARINC RX
ARINC TX
SERIAL
GRAPHICS
REVIEW
SYS CONFIG
2/4
AiRCRAFT
CLEARANCES
ALERTS
SYS CONFIG
3/4
SYS CONFIG
4/4
23-20-06
Page A2-5
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
2.
UniLink Menus and Submenus – with FANS
A.
UniLink Menu 1/2
UNILINK
MENU
FLIGHT INFO
D-ATIS
TWIP
DEPARTURE
CLX
OCEANIC
CLX
OCEANIC
CLX ATC
VERIFY
MSGS
PUSHBACK
CLX
EXP TAXI CLX
ATC
ATC
EMERGENCY
ATC REVIEW
(MAYDAY)
ATC REVIEW
(PAN)
ATC REVIEW
(Cancel
Emergency)
ATC LOG ON
1/2
ATC LOG ON
2/2
ATC LOG ON
TO
(LOG ON TO Region
pages including:
- N PACIFIC
- S PACIFIC
- ASIA
- INDIAN OCEAN
- N ATLANTIC
- S ATLANTIC
- EUROPE)
23-20-06
Page A2-6
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
UniLink Menu 1/2 – Continued
23-20-06
Page A2-7
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
UniLink Menu 1/2 – Continued
23-20-06
Page A2-8
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
UniLink Menu 1/2 – Continued
NOTES:
1. Only available if VHF is enabled in configuration (UL-800 only).
2. Only available if SAT is enabled in configuration.
3. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration.
23-20-06
Page A2-9
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
B.
Maintenance Menu
UNILINK
MENU
Continued
MAINTENANCE
1/3
DEVICES
SENSORS 1/2
DISCRETES
BCST DATA
SOURCE FMS
SENSORS 2/2
VDR STATUS
VERSIONS
ERROR LOG
SYS CONFIG
1/4
I/O CONFIG
DISC IN
VHF CONFIG
DISC OUT
SAT CONFIG
ARINC RX
PRIORITY
ARINC TX
TEL CONFIG
SERIAL
POS REPORT
GRAPHICS
REVIEW
23-20-06
Page A2-10
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
B.
Maintenance Menu – Continued
Includes Configuration Menu choices
23-20-06
Page A2-11
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
C.
OPS Menu
NOTES:
1. Only available if OOOI is enabled in configuration.
2. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration.
23-20-06
Page A2-12
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
OPS Menu – Continued
NOTES:
1. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration.
2. The SELCAL option only displays when associated messages are
available. Check with DSP for availability of this feature.
23-20-06
Page A2-13
15 December 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Appendix 3
This appendix contains a list of Datalink Service Providers (DSP) that may be used with the
UniLink.
1. Datalink Service Providers
Providers
Contact Information
https://direct.ARINC.net
ARINC Direct
Honeywell OneLink Aero-I and Aero-M Communication Services
941-360-0680 (24 hr.)
602-822-7502 (Fax)
Aviation.Services@Honeywell.com
Sat Com Direct
888-448-9003
321-777-3000
321-777-3702 (Fax)
SATCOM1
+ 45 4615 4546
http://satcom1.com/
Sita
http://www.sita.aero/
Universal Weather and Aviation
801-231-5600
713-944-1622
713-943-4610 (Fax)
23-20-06
Page A3-1
15 December 2011
</pre></table><hr>Source Exif Data: <br /><pre>File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.4
Linearized : Yes
XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Creator Tool : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Modify Date : 2011:12:15 14:07:12-07:00
Create Date : 2011:12:15 14:07:12-07:00
Format : application/pdf
Title : Microsoft Word - 23-20-06.docx
Creator : kketcham
Producer : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
Document ID : uuid:6de74580-e905-4f4b-92b6-d44d41ef984b
Instance ID : uuid:67025b1a-4ec5-4f47-b78c-06b22769d274
Page Count : 219
Author : kketcham
</pre>
<small>EXIF Metadata provided by <a href="https://exif.tools/">EXIF.tools</a></small>
</div><h5>FCC ID Filing: <a href="https://fccid.io/NWS10801" >NWS10801</a></h5></div></div></div></div>
<div id="catlinks" class="catlinks catlinks-allhidden" data-mw="interface"></div> <div class="visualClear"></div>
</div>
</div>
<div id="mw-navigation">
<h2>Navigation menu</h2>
<div id="mw-head">
<div id="p-personal" role="navigation" class="" aria-labelledby="p-personal-label">
<!-- <div id="p-search" role="search">
<form action="https://usermanual.wiki/search.php" id="searchform">
<div id="simpleSearch">
<input type="search" name="search" placeholder="Search UserManual.wiki" title="Search UserManual.wiki [ctrl-option-f]" accesskey="f" id="searchInput" tabindex="1" autocomplete="off"><input type="hidden" value="Special:Search" name="title"><input type="submit" name="go" value="Go" title="Find a User Manual" id="searchButton" class="searchButton"> </div>
</form>
</div>-->
<ul>
<li id="pt-mycontris"><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/upload" title="Upload User Manual" accesskey="y">Upload a User Manual</a></li>
</ul>
</div>
<div id="left-navigation">
<div id="p-namespaces" role="navigation" class="vectorTabs" aria-labelledby="p-namespaces-label">
<h3 id="p-namespaces-label">Namespaces</h3>
<ul>
<li id="ca-nstab-main" ><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Universal-Avionics-Systems/10801.Users-Manual-6" title="User Manual Wiki" accesskey="c">Wiki Guide</a></span></li>
<!--<li id="ca-talk" class="new"><span><a href="#" title="Image Version" accesskey="t" rel="discussion">Image</a></span></li>-->
<li id="ca-talk" ><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Universal-Avionics-Systems/10801.Users-Manual-6/html" title="Web User Manual" accesskey="t" rel="discussion">HTML</a></span></li>
<li id="ca-talk" ><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Universal-Avionics-Systems/10801.Users-Manual-6/pdf" title="PDF User Manual" accesskey="t" rel="discussion">PDF</a></span></li>
<li id="ca-talk" class="selected"><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Universal-Avionics-Systems/10801.Users-Manual-6/info" title="User Manual Text and Information" accesskey="t" rel="discussion">Info</a></span></li>
</ul>
</div>
</div>
<div id="right-navigation">
<div id="p-views" role="navigation" class="vectorTabs" aria-labelledby="p-views-label">
<h3 id="p-views-label">Views</h3>
<ul>
<li id="ca-view" class="selected"><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Universal-Avionics-Systems/10801">User Manual</a></span></li>
<li id="ca-edit" ><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Universal-Avionics-Systems/10801/help" title="Ask a question" accesskey="e">Discussion / Help</a></span></li>
</ul>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div id="mw-panel">
<div id="p-logo" role="banner"><a class="mw-wiki-logo" href="https://usermanual.wiki/Main_Page" title="Visit the main page"></a></div>
<div class="portal" role="navigation" id="p-navigation" aria-labelledby="p-navigation-label">
<h3 id="p-navigation-label">Navigation</h3>
</div>
<div class="portal" role="navigation" id="p-tb" aria-labelledby="p-tb-label">
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div id="footer" role="contentinfo">
<ul id="footer-info">
<li id="footer-info-lastmod">© 2024 UserManual.wiki | <a href="/privacy_policy.php" rel="nofollow">Privacy Policy</a></li>
</ul>
<ul id="footer-places">
<li id="footer-places-privacy"><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/ContactUs" title="UserManual.wiki:Contact Us">Contact Us</a></li>
<li id="footer-places-about"><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/DMCA" title="UserManual.wiki:DMCA">DMCA</a></li>
</ul>
<ul id="footer-icons" class="noprint">
<li id="footer-poweredbyico">
<div style="display:none;">
<div id="google_translate_element"></div>
</div>
<script type="text/javascript">
function googleTranslateElementInit() {
new google.translate.TranslateElement({pageLanguage: 'en'}, 'google_translate_element');
}
</script>
<script type="text/javascript" src="//translate.google.com/translate_a/element.js?cb=googleTranslateElementInit"></script>
</li>
</ul>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
</div>
<script src="//instant.page/1.0.0" type="module" integrity="sha384-6w2SekMzCkuMQ9sEbq0cLviD/yR2HfA/+ekmKiBnFlsoSvb/VmQFSi/umVShadQI"></script>
</body></html>
<script src="/cdn-cgi/scripts/7d0fa10a/cloudflare-static/rocket-loader.min.js" data-cf-settings="84a26849c0bb198c05833cae-|49" defer></script>